Microsoft Network Client Version 2.

Users Guide for MS-DOS Clients

HP Part No. J2716-90006 Printed in U.S.A. E0496

Legal Notices

Legal Notices
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Companies, names, and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Microsoft Corporation. Copyright 1992-1993 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.

Microsoft, MS, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks and Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of America and other countries. U.S. Patent No. 4955066 3Com and EtherLink are registered trademarks of 3Com Corporation. Compaq is a registered trademark of Compaq Computer Corporation. DCA is a registered trademark of Digital Communications Associates, Inc. Everex is a trademark of Everex Systems, Inc. DynaComm is a registered trademark of Future Soft Engineering, Inc. Ethertwist and Hewlett-Packard are registered trademarks of HewlettPackard Company. Intel is a registered trademark and Ether Express and Token Express are trademarks of Intel Corporation. IBM, Operating System/2, and OS/2 are registered trademarks of

Legal Notices

International Business Machines Corporation. Microcom is a registered trademark of Microcom Systems, Inc. Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. Stacker is a registered trademark of STAC Electronics. SMC is a registered trademark of Standard Microsystems Corporation. Tulip is a registered trademark of Tulip Computers, International, B.V. Ungermann-Bass is a registered trademark of Ungermann-Bass, Inc. Rumba is a registered trademark and Wall Data is a trademark of Wall Data Incorporated. Western Digital is a trademark of Western Digital Corporation. XNS is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.

Preface

Preface
The Users Guide for MS-DOS Clients is for users of Microsoft LAN Manager for the MS-DOS operating system. This manual describes how to use the LAN Manager Screen menu commands for the Enhanced version and how to use typed commands for the Basic version. It also shows you how to use NetWare Connectivity, the feature that allows you to use a Novell NetWare network from your LAN Manager workstation, and the Remote Access service (RAS), the feature that allows off-site PC users transparent access to network resources. LAN Manager can also be used through the Microsoft Windows operating system, version 3.0 or higher. LAN Manager version 2.2 integrates well with networks that include Windows NT workstations, Microsoft Windows for Workgroups clients, and Microsoft Workgroup Connection clients. These clients can all connect to the Windows NT workstations or Windows NT Advanced Servers or to the LAN Manager servers, and LAN Manager client workstations can connect to Windows for Workgroups resources. For information about using the Windows for Workgroups client or the Workgroup Connection client, see the documentation accompanying the product. For information about using a LAN Manager client to connect to a Windows for Workgroups resource, see the Microsoft Windows for Workgroups documentation or the Users Guide for Microsoft Windows Clients. This manual assumes that you know how to use a personal computer and that you are familiar with MS-DOS. If you are not familiar with MS-DOS, see your MS-DOS manual(s). How LAN Manager for MS-DOS Works LAN Manager expands the features of MS-DOS to connect your computer to a Windows NT or LAN Manager local area network (LAN). A local area network is a group of personal computers that communicate with each other and share resources such as disk drives, directories, and printers. A network is made up of workstations and servers. Workstations are computers that can use the network resources. They may be on a desk in an office, or they may be in a manufacturing area or at a customer service desk.

Preface

Servers are the computers that control the network resources. Your workstation runs MS-DOS; other workstations on the network may run Windows NT, MS-DOS, Operating System/2 (OS/2), Microsoft Windows, or Windows for Workgroups. Resources are made available to you and to other network users through a process called sharing. The servers on a network share resources with network users at workstations. First you gain access, or log on, to the network and connect your workstation to a server. Then you can use the network resources as though they were attached directly to your workstation. For example, you can connect to a network printer thats down the hall or in another part of the building, and then print as though the printer were physically attached to your workstation. You can also use your workstation to use client-server applications that your administrator has set up for you. Client-server applications use the capabilities of both your workstation (the client) and the server to perform a task. For example, a massive database that is to be shared by all users on the network can be kept on a server to assure that all users see the same data and that security and business policies are enforced for the data it contains. Individuals can access this data as needed, using the processing power of the client computers to provide the interface and to work with the data. To simplify administration and security, a network with Windows NT Advanced Servers or LAN Manager servers can be divided into unique groups of workstations and servers called domains. When you start your workstation, you log on in a domain usually the one that has the servers you use most often. But because all the domains are part of the same local area network, you can use shared resources on servers in other domains. Computers running Windows NT can be grouped into workgroups, which function much like domains. A network is maintained by one or more network administrators, who share resources at servers and manage network security. If you need a password to connect to a shared resource, or if you have trouble using your workstation, ask your administrator for help. Different Versions of LAN Manager LAN Manager client software for MS-DOS is available in two versions, Basic and Enhanced. If you are not sure which version you have, ask your

Preface

administrator. Basic Version You use LAN Manager Basic by typing commands at the MS-DOS prompt. With LAN Manager Basic, you can:
Add your computer to a network. Use shared disk drives, directories, files, and printers. Get online Help. Display the contents of printer queues. Pause and continue connections to network resources. Use client-server applications.

To learn how to use LAN Manager Basic, see Part 2 of this manual. Enhanced Version LAN Manager Enhanced offers you all the features of the LAN Manager Basic, plus the added convenience of the LAN Manager Screen. With LAN Manager Enhanced, you can:
Choose between using menu commands and typing commands. Get online Help with the LAN Manager Screen and command-line commands. Display the contents of printer queues and control print jobs in a queue. Move and copy files between any two directories on the network. Exchange messages with other network users. Use named pipes. Use client-server applications.

To learn how to use LAN Manager Enhanced, see Part 1 of this manual. Finding Further Information This manual is written for users of LAN Manager 2.2 for MS-DOS. In addition to this manual, this documentation set includes the following LAN Manager manuals: Users Guide for Microsoft Windows Clients
Provides instructions on how to log on and off, send and receive messages, and 6

Preface

browse, connect to, and disconnect from network resources, all through Microsoft Windows icons.

Installation Guide for Clients

Provides procedures to install LAN Manager software, and information about the network device drivers used with LAN Manager and about configuring workstations and servers.

NetWare Connectivity Guide

Provides information about installing and administering the NetWare Connectivity feature of LAN Manager, which allows MS-DOS workstations to access Novell NetWare servers as well as Windows NT computers and LAN Manager servers.

Preface

Contents

1 Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Starting LAN Manager Enhanced 23
Starting the Workstation Service and Logging On 24 Additional Network Services 25

Using the LAN Manager Screen 26

Using CTRL+BREAK to Break Out of Network Requests Using Menus and Menu Commands 27 View Menu 28 Message Menu 29 Cong Menu 29 Accounts Menu 30 Help Menu 30 Using Dialog Boxes 31 Dialog Box Elements 31 Getting Help from the LAN Manager Screen 34 27

Viewing Network Resources 36

Setting the Current Focus 36 Viewing Shared Resources 37 Network Paths 37 Viewing Users on the Network 38

Understanding User Accounts 40

Viewing Information About User Accounts Changing Your Password 42 40

Starting LAN Manager Services 43 Stopping LAN Manager Services 44 Pausing LAN Manager Services 45

Contents

Continuing LAN Manager Services 46 Pausing and Continuing Connections to Resources 47 Viewing the Workstation Conguration 48 Using Home Directories 49 Exiting the LAN Manager Screen 50 Quitting LAN Manager Enhanced 51
Logging Off from the Network 51

Starting LAN Manager Enhanced Automatically 53 Running Other Network Protocols 54 Using the TEMP Environment Variable 55

2 Using Shared Directories Viewing Shared Directories 59 Connecting to a Shared Directory 60

Connecting to a Shared Directory Without Setting the Focus Controlling Persistent Connections 61 Connecting to an IBM LAN Server Resource 62 Making a Onetime Connection to a Shared Directory 62 If You Have Trouble Connecting 63 61

Viewing Your Connections to Shared Directories 64 Copying Files over the Network 65

10

Contents

Moving Files over the Network 66 Running a Program on a Server 67 Disconnecting from a Shared Directory 68

3 Using Shared Printers Printer Queues 70 Viewing Printer Queues and Print Jobs 71 Connecting to a Printer Queue 72
Connecting to Printer Queues Without Setting the Focus Making a Onetime Connection to a Printer Queue 73 Printing over the Network 74 72

Viewing Your Connections to Printer Queues 75 Holding, Releasing, and Deleting a Print Job 76 Disconnecting from a Shared Printer Queue 78
If a Print Job Fails to Send an End-of-Job Signal 78

Managing a Shared Printer 80

Recommendations for Using a Shared Printer 80 Administrators Responsibilities 81 Your Responsibilities 82 Maintaining the Link to the Server for Clispool or Clipcach Using the Print Station Utility 83

82

11

Contents

4 Sending and Receiving Messages Sending Messages 87 Reading Messages 89

Using the Netpopup Service 89 Reading Your Message Log 90 Renaming the Message Log File 91 Stopping and Starting Message Logging Printing Messages 92

91

Using Aliases 93
Adding an Alias 93 Deleting an Alias 93

5 Enhanced Reference Abbreviating Commands and Options 96 Using the /Yes and /No Options 97 Using Passwords with Commands 98 Controlling a Screen Display 99 Using Commands in Batch Programs 100 Command and Utility Summary 101
Getting Help from the Command Line 104 Getting Help with Error Messages 105 Addname 106 Clipcach 109 Clispool 112

12

Contents

Kermit 115 Load 117 Net 119 Net Access 120 Net Cong Workstation 124 Net Continue 125 Net Copy 127 Net Help 130 Net Helpmsg 132 Net Log 133 Net Logoff 135 Net Logon 136 Net Move 140 Net Name 142 Net Password 145 Net Pause 148 Net Print 150 Net Send 154 Net Start Encrypt 157 Net Start Messenger 158 Net Start Netpopup 160 Net Start Workstation 161 Net Stop Workstation 163 Net Time 164 Net Use 165 Net Version 170 Net View 171 Net Who 173 Netbind 175 Netrun 176 Nwload 179 Nwunload 180 Ping 181 Printsta 182

13

Contents

Prtsc 189 Uchmod 190 Ud 193 Udir 195 Unload 198 Uren 199

6 Using LAN Manager Basic Starting LAN Manager Basic 203 Getting Help 204 Using Shared Directories 205
Connecting to a Shared Directory 205 Using MS-DOS Commands with Shared Directories Disconnecting From a Shared Directory 208 207

Using Shared Printers 210

Connecting to a Shared Printer Queue 210 Printing over the Network 211 Viewing the Status of a Print Job 211 Disconnecting from a Shared Printer Queue 212 If a Print Job Fails to Send an End-of-Job Signal 212

Listing Connections to Network Resources 214 Pausing and Continuing Connections 215 Managing a Shared Printer 216
Recommendations for Using a Shared Printer Administrators Responsibilities 217 Your Responsibilities 218 216

14

Contents

Maintaining the Link to the Server for Clispool or Clipcach Using the Print Station Utility 219

218

7 Basic Reference Abbreviating Commands and Options 222 Using the /Yes and /No Options 223 Using Passwords with Commands 224 Controlling a Screen Display 225 Using Commands in Batch Programs 226 Command and Utility Summary 227 Using UNIX System Commands 229
Addname 230 Clipcach 232 Clispool 235 Kermit 238 Load 240 Net Continue 242 Net Help 243 Net Name 245 Net Pause 246 Net Print 247 Net Start Workstation Net Use 250 Netrun 255 Nwload 258 Nwunload 259

249

15

Contents

Ping 260 Printsta 261 Prtsc 268 Uchmod 269 Ud 272 Udir 274 Unload 277 Uren 278

A Country Codes

B Using NetWare Connectivity How NetWare Connectivity Works 285 Starting and Stopping LAN Manager and NetWare 286 Working with NetWare Connectivity 287
Using Microsoft Windows with NetWare Connectivity 287 Enabling NetWare Broadcast Messaging 288 Using NetWare Connectivity from the Command Line 288 Connecting to Network Directories 289 Connecting to Network Printer Queues 290 Using NetWare, Windows NT Advanced Server, and LAN Manager Commands

291

C Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server FileNaming Conventions 298 Displaying Files 299

16

Contents

Displaying Filenames in the MS-DOS Format 299 Displaying Filenames in the UNIX System Format 299 Using the Udir Command on Local Client Drives 301

Renaming UNIX System Files 302

Using the Uren Command to Move Files 302

Handling Incompatible File Formats 304 Converting Text Files 305

Using the Ud Command 305 Guidelines for Using the Ud Command 306 Options 306 Piping and Redirecting Converted Files 306

Changing UNIX System Permissions for LAN Manager Files 308 Using the Kermit Terminal Emulator 309
Logging on to a UNIX System Host from a Workstation Logging Off of a UNIX System Host 311 Temporarily Accessing the MS-DOS Prompt 311 Transferring Files 311 309

D Troubleshooting Isolating Problems 317

Before You Try Anything Else... 317 Troubleshooting Your Computer 318 Troubleshooting a Shared Printer 318 Jobs Not Printing 319 Jobs Not Printing in the Background 319 Text Entered Is Not Displayed 320

17

Contents

Drive ID Unlinked 320 Keyboard Locked Up 320

E Using Remote Access Service Installing RAS 323

Installing on MS-DOS 323 Installing on Microsoft Windows 324 Installing on Dual-Role Workstations 325 Conserving Memory on MS-DOS Workstations 326 Unloading the RAS Drivers 326 Loading the RAS Drivers Into Upper Memory with LAN Manager

326

Using the Network 328

Connecting to the Network 328 Disconnecting from the Network 329 User Commands 329 Finding Help About Phone Book 330 Modifying Phone Numbers 330

Troubleshooting 332
Common Problems 332 Network Access Problems 332 Connection and Response Problems 332 Modem Problems 333 Display Problems 333 Loading and Unloading Problems 333 Performance Problems 334 Error Codes 334

Modems 339
Using Nonsupported Modems 339

18

Contents

Understanding MODEMS.INF 339 Adding a New Modem to MODEMS.INF 343 MODEMS.INF Macros 344 Modifying Your Modem Initialization Strings 344 Error Control and Compression 345

Conguration Files 347

CONFIG.SYS 347 LANMAN.INI 347 PROTOCOL.INI 347

Tuning 349
Modifying LANMAN.INI on MS-DOS-based Workstations 349

Compatibility Issues 351

19

Contents

20

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced

21

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced

This chapter introduces LAN Manager Enhanced and explains how to start your workstation and log on to the network, how to use the LAN Manager screen, how to get Help, and how to quit LAN Manager. If LAN Manager Enhanced is not installed on your workstation, contact your administrator.

22

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Starting LAN Manager Enhanced

Starting LAN Manager Enhanced

Starting LAN Manager Enhanced involves two separate actions:
Starting the Workstation service Logging on to the network

A service is a program that performs one of the major functions of LAN Manager. The Workstation service connects your workstation to the network, so that you can use network resources. The Workstation service must be running in order for other services to run. When you start the Workstation service, information that lets you use shared resources and send and receive messages is loaded into your computer's memory. Logging on identies you on the network and establishes you as the user of the workstation you logged on from. When you log on, you supply your username and password, which identify you as a member of a domain, a collection of workstations and servers on the network. Logging on also restores the connections that were in effect the last time you logged on. If you dont want to have connections restored each time you log on, you can turn this feature off, following the directions in Chapter 2, Using Shared Directories. Domains are used on networks that have Windows NT Advanced Servers or LAN Manager servers. Domains keep the network organized and simplify administration. They have names, just like workstations and servers. When you log on, you automatically log on in the workstation domain. You don't need to specify the workstation domain name; it is specied in the LAN Manager Enhanced software. You can override the workstation domain by supplying the name of a different domain in which to log on. This domain is called the logon domain. A server called a domain controller or logon server veries that you are allowed to log on in a particular domain. On this server, the administrator maintains a record of user accounts, which dene the hours that each user can log on and the access that users have to resources in the domain.

23

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Starting LAN Manager Enhanced

Starting the Workstation Service and Logging On

You must start the Workstation service before you can log on to the network or use the LAN Manager screen. To start the Workstation service
At the MS-DOS prompt, type net start workstation.

After the Workstation service starts, you must log on to the network.
NOTE: When using R:BASE 3.10 on a computer with expanded or Lotus/Intel/Microsoft (LIM) memory, do not allow the LAN Manager Workstation service to reside in expanded memory. Make sure the lim parameter has not been set to yes in the [workstation] section of LANMAN.INI, or start the workstation with the following command: net start workstation /lim:no If the lim parameter is not specified in the LANMAN.INI file, the value will default to no, and you need not specify it in the net start workstation command.

To log on to the network

1 NOTE: Start the LAN Manager screen from the MS-DOS prompt by typing net.

Typing net /mono improves the LAN Manager screen display for some computer screens. Try typing the command with and without the /mono option to determine which display you prefer. The Log Onto Network box appears. Your username should appear in the Username text box. A text box is an area in a dialog box surrounded by brackets that contains or receives information you type. If your username does not appear in the Username box, see your administrator. You can specify a different username by typing over the username that appears. 2 Press TAB to move the cursor to the Password box, and then type your password. (Your administrator will give you a password. You can change it later.) The password does not appear when you type it. If you enter the wrong password, access is denied and you will have to try again. If you enter the wrong password on several tries, you may be locked out of the system. This protects your account from anyone who may try to guess your password. Your network administrator can remove the lock by re-enabling your account. 24

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Starting LAN Manager Enhanced

If your password is within three weeks of expiring, a warning appears to remind you to change it. If the password has already expired, you must change the password in order to log on. See Changing Your Password, later in this chapter. 3 Press TAB to move to the Domain box. This box displays the workstation domain. To specify another domain, type a new domain name.

NOTE:

To use other domains, the othdomains parameter must be specified in the LANMAN.INI file, or as an option to the net start workstation command. For more information, see the Installation Guide for Clients. 4 Press TAB to move to the OK button, and then press ENTER. Message boxes appear, telling you that your logon was successful and what privilege level you have on your workstation. The privilege level denes the range of action you have on your workstation (or on a server). If you cannot log onfor example, if you mistype your password, or if a loose cable or similar hardware problem prevents communicationsa message appears telling you the type of problem that occurred. 5 To clear message boxes from the LAN Manager screen, press ESC.

Additional Network Services

Along with the Workstation service, LAN Manager Enhanced automatically starts three other services:
The Messenger service, which lets you send and receive messages, and log messages in a file. The Encrypt service, which encrypts passwords before sending them across the network. The Netpopup service, which displays messages on your workstation screen when they are received from another user or a server on the network.

These services are described in more detail in Chapter 4, Sending and Receiving Messages.

25

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Using the LAN Manager Screen

Using the LAN Manager Screen

Using the LAN Manager screen, you can browse around the network, locate shared resources, and connect to those resources without having to memorize commands or syntax. These are the elements of the LAN Manager screen: Menu bar
Displays the names of menus from which you can choose commands.

Current focus
Shows the computername of your workstation or the server that is the focus of activity when using LAN Manager screen commands.

Workstation information
Provides the following information about your workstation: Your username The username you specified when you logged on to the network. Your computername The computername specified when you started the Workstation service. Your domain The name of your logon domain. This is the domain name you specified when you logged on to the network. If you didn't specify a domain name, you automatically logged on in the workstation domain. Note that the workstation domain and the logon domain are the same when you log on in the workstation domain.

Servers in the logon and workstation domains

Lists the servers in your logon and workstation domains.

Scroll bar
Lets you use a mouse to scroll through the servers in the list box.

Message line
Provides a brief statement about the menu, command, or current task. 26

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Using the LAN Manager Screen

To perform tasks using the LAN Manager screen, you select a menu, which displays a list of commands. When you choose a command, a dialog box appears. In the dialog box you type information necessary to perform a task.

Using CTRL+BREAK to Break Out of Network Requests

You can stop network requests that were initiated at the MS-DOS command line or in the LAN Manager screen with the CTRL+BREAK key combination. If you are using the Windows operating system version 3.1, and an uncompleted network request that was initiated from an MS-DOS window appears to have halted your computer, press CTRL+ALT+DEL to reach the MS-DOS window, and then press CTRL+BREAK to stop the network request. Do not use CTRL+BREAK to stop network requests that were issued through a Microsoft Windows program such as File Manager.

Using Menus and Menu Commands

LAN Manager operations begin with the menus that appear in the bar across the top of the LAN Manager screen. When you select a menu, a list of commands appears. Commands lead to dialog boxes where you supply additional information. Every command name contains a highlighted letter that you can use to choose that command from the keyboard (press the corresponding letter to choose the command). When a menu command is unavailable, no letter is highlighted. You can select a menu with a mouse, positioning the pointer on the menu name and clicking the left mouse button. The menu appears, and you can choose a menu command the same way.
NOTE: The LAN Manager screen does not recognize a left-handed mouse.

27

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Using the LAN Manager Screen

You can also use the following keys to view and select menus and choose commands:
Key ALT Highlighted letter Action Activates menu names on the menu bar. When menu names are activated with ALT or menu commands are displayed, selects the menu or chooses the menu command that contains the highlighted letter. When a menu appears, moves from one menu to another. When a menu appears, moves from one command to another. Selects the highlighted menu or menu command. Clears a menu from the screen.

ENTER ESC View Menu

With commands from the View menu, you can view shared resources on the server of current focus, make connections to shared resources, view your workstations connections, view information about users of LAN Manager servers on the network, and exit the LAN Manager screen. These are the View menu commands: Available resources
Displays the various resources available on the server of current focus. These resources include shared directories (disks) and printers.

Printer queues
Displays the print queues on the server of current focus and the print jobs in each queue.

Used resources
Displays the resources that your workstation is connected to on the server of current focus. You can connect your workstation to resources shared by servers other than the server of current focus, as well as to resources shared by non-LAN

28

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Using the LAN Manager Screen

Manager servers.

Users on a server
Displays the users that are logged on to the server of current focus, if that server is a LAN Manager server.

Users on a domain
Displays the users that are logged on to LAN Manager servers in a domain.

Exit
Removes the LAN Manager screen. Also, you can press ALT+F4 to exit the screen at any time. Message Menu

With commands from the Message menu, you can send, log, and read messages, and add and delete aliases. These are the Message menu commands: Send a typed message
Sends a message to one or more users on the network.

Log messages to le
Selects the log file that stores your messages, and pauses and continues message logging.

Read message log le

Displays the messages in your message log file.

Aliases
Displays the message aliases on your workstation. With this command, you can add message aliases to and delete message aliases from your workstation. Config Menu

With commands from the Cong menu, you can log on and log off, and view your workstation conguration.

29

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Using the LAN Manager Screen

These are the Cong menu commands: Log on to LAN

Logs you on to the network.

Log off from LAN

Logs you off from the network.

Workstation options
Displays information about your workstations configuration. Accounts Menu

With commands from the Accounts menu, you can view information about your account and change your password. These are the Accounts menu commands: Your account
Displays information about your account.

Change your password

With this command, you can change your password at a server. Help Menu

With commands from the Help menu, you can access online Help. These are the Help menu commands: General help
Describes the LAN Manager screen and how to use it.

Keyboard
Describes using the LAN Manager screen with a keyboard.

Mouse
Describes using the LAN Manager screen with a mouse.

Table of contents
Displays a list of tasks you can perform from the LAN Manager screen.

30

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Using the LAN Manager Screen

Glossary of terms
Displays an alphabetical list of terms and definitions used with LAN Manager Enhanced.

Using Help
Explains how to use Help.

About LAN Manager

Describes the version of LAN Manager installed and displays a copyright notice.

Using Dialog Boxes

You use dialog boxes to supply information needed for performing a task. Dialog boxes contain as many as ve types of areas, or elements. Each dialog box has a title, which appears at the top of the dialog box.
Dialog Box Elements

Dialog boxes contain one or more of the following elements:

Text boxes, in which you type information List boxes, which present a list of items to select from Option buttons, which let you select one of several options Command buttons, which perform an action Check boxes, which let you select or clear an option

Use the following keys to move around in dialog boxes:

Key Highlighted letter Action Moves the cursor to the element that contains the highlighted letter. (If the cursor is in a list or a text box, hold down ALT while pressing the highlighted letter.) Pressing the highlighted letter in a command button activates the command. Moves the cursor to the next eld. Moves the cursor to the previous eld.

TAB SHIFT+TAB

31

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Using the LAN Manager Screen

Key ENTER ESC

Action Carries out the actions you specify. Cancels any specied actions and closes the dialog box.

Text Boxes You type information in a text box. A text box is surrounded by brackets and contains a series of dots that are replaced with characters as you type. A text box sometimes holds more characters than appear between the brackets. You can view these characters by using the right arrow key to scroll to the left. Sometimes a text box appears with information already in it. For example, your username already appears in the text box LAN Manager displays when you log on to the network. When in a text box, use the following keys:
Key HOME END DEL BACKSPACE Action Moves the cursor one space to the left. Moves the cursor one space to the right. Moves the cursor to the rst character in the text box. Moves the cursor to the last character in the text box. Deletes the character that the cursor is on. Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.

If you are using a mouse, you can scroll the text in a text box by clicking the left or right bracket. List Boxes In a list box, you can view items by scrolling through the list, and you can select one of the items. For example, you can view lists of resources on a server or print jobs waiting to print in a list box.

32

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Using the LAN Manager Screen

Use the following keys to move around in a list box:

Key PAGE UP PAGE DOWN HOME END F5 Action Moves the cursor up one line. Moves the cursor down one line. Moves the cursor up one page. A page is the portion of a list that appears on the screen. Moves the cursor down one page. Moves the cursor to the top of a list. Moves the cursor to the bottom of a list. Updates a list.

Pressing a letter while the cursor is in a list box (including the list box of server names on the LAN Manager screen) moves the cursor to the next item that begins with that letter. A scroll bar and a scroll box appear at the right of a list box. The scroll bar lets you use the mouse to move through a list that contains more than one screen of information. Click the up or down arrow to move the view up or down one line. The position of the scroll box reects the position of the information in the window relative to the total contents of the list. You can move through the list with the mouse by dragging the scroll box. Drag the scroll box by positioning the pointer on the scroll box, holding the left mouse button down, and then moving the mouse. To select an item in a list box with the mouse, click the item. If the dialog box containing the list box has a Zoom button, double-clicking an item in the list (positioning the pointer on the item and quickly pressing and releasing the left mouse button twice) zooms, presenting more information about the item. Otherwise, double-clicking performs the action corresponding to the rst command button in the dialog box. If a dialog box has a pair of list boxes, double-clicking an item in one list box often moves it to the other list box.

33

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Using the LAN Manager Screen

Check Boxes With a check box, you turn an option on or off. When a check box is marked with an X, the option is on. When the cursor is in a check box, you can use the SPACEBAR as a toggle to select or clear the box. To select or clear a check box with the mouse, click inside it. Option Buttons With an option button, you select one option from a group of options. One option button is always selected, and you can select only one option button at a time. To select an option button, use the following keys:
Key Action Changes the selection to the previous option. Changes the selection to the next option.

To select an option button with the mouse, click it. Command Buttons A command button performs a specic LAN Manager task. To choose a command button, press TAB to move to the button, and then press ENTER. You can also choose a command button by pressing the key that corresponds to the highlighted letter in the command button. When a command button does not contain a highlighted letter, the command button is unavailable. To choose a command button with the mouse, click it.

Getting Help from the LAN Manager Screen

There are two ways to get Help while using the LAN Manager screen: by selecting the Help menu and by pressing F1. The Help menu provides access to Help topics, which appear on your screen in message boxes called Help boxes.

34

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Using the LAN Manager Screen

To get information about a menu, command, or dialog box, press F1 while that item is displayed. If you press F1 when no dialog box or menu is displayed, the Help Using the LAN Manager screen box appears. You can use the arrow keys to scroll the text, or you can use a mouse to scroll. To remove a Help box from the screen, choose the Done button or press ESC.

35

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Viewing Network Resources

Viewing Network Resources

With commands from the View menu, you can view servers and shared resources on the network, and you can view users on a server or in a domain. You can also view Windows for Workgroups resources. After you log on, a list of servers in your workstation domain (or in your logon domain when you specify a domain other than your workstation domain at logon) appears in the list box on the LAN Manager screen. You may not have access to all the servers listed, and not all of the servers you have access to may be visible. Your administrator determines whether a server is visible on the network. Check with your administrator to nd out which servers are available to you. For information about using a LAN Manager client to connect to a Windows for Workgroups or Workgroup Connections resource, see the Microsoft Windows for Workgroups or Microsoft Wokgroup Connections documentation.
NOTE: To view resources on the server, the network server running the Netlogon service and the MS-DOS workstation must both run the same protocol (for example, NetBEUI). If the workstation and server are not running the same protocol, attempts to view resources on the server will fail. If you are experiencing problems viewing resources, see your network administrator.

Setting the Current Focus

When you start the LAN Manager screen, the Current Focus line and the Set Current Focus On text box display your workstations computername. These displays indicate that the current focus of your activity when you use menus and dialog boxes is your workstation. To connect to shared resources and perform other tasks on servers, you must rst change the current focus to the server sharing the resources you want to view or use. This makes the server the current focus of activity.

36

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Viewing Network Resources

To set the current focus on a server

1 Select the computername of the server you want to focus on by: Pressing the first letter of the server's computername Or Scrolling through the list box until the name appears in the Set current focus on text box Or 2 Typing the servers computername in the Set current focus on text box

Press ENTER, or double-click the server name. The server's computername appears on the Current focus line, and a message box appears that shows your privileges on that server.

Viewing Shared Resources

After setting the current focus on a server, you can view that servers shared resources, such as directories and printers available to network users. To view shared resources on a server
1 2 Set the current focus on the server that you want to view. From the View menu, choose Available Resources. The Resources Available at \\computername dialog box appears. The Resources Available at \\computername dialog box shows the resources available on the server you specied. The information in the Type column indicates the type of each resource in the list. Disk refers to shared directories; Printer refers to shared printers. 3 Choose the Done button.

For more information about connecting to and using shared resources, see Chapter 2, Using Shared Directories, and Chapter 3, Using Shared Printers.
Network Paths

Every shared resource on the network is identied by a network path. A network path is the computername of the server sharing the resource, followed by the resources sharename--the name an administrator assigns to
37

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Viewing Network Resources

it. Network paths are used in dialog boxes and in commands typed at the MSDOS prompt. When you type a network path at the MS-DOS prompt, precede the computername by two backslashes (\\), and precede the sharename by one backslash (\). For example, \\SALES\REPORTS species the network path for the REPORTS shared directory on the \\SALES server. For UNIX servers only, computernames for servers end with the sufx .SERVE. Therefore, computernames are in the form of computername.SERVE, where computername is the name of the UNIX system computer that is running the LAN Manager server software. Throughout this document, servernames and computernames are used interchangeably.

Viewing Users on the Network

You can view a list of users whose workstations are connected to a particular LAN Manager server that is running the Netlogon service or who are logged on in a particular LAN Manager domain. Otherwise, you can only view users on LAN Manager domain controllers that are running the Netlogon service. To view information about users connected to a server
1 2 Set the current focus on the server that has the users you want to view. From the View menu, choose Users on a server. The Current Users on Server \\computername dialog box appears. For each user with a connection to the server you specied, the Current Users on Server \\computername dialog box lists the username, the computername of the workstation where the user is logged on, the length of time elapsed since the connection was established, and the users full name. If the Netlogon service is not running on the server of focus, you see an error message. 3 To view more information about a user, select the username in the list box, and choose the Zoom button. The Information on user username dialog box appears. 4 Choose the Done button.

38

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Viewing Network Resources

Choose the Done button again.

To view users logged on in a domain

1 From the View menu, choose Users on a domain. The Select a Domain to View dialog box appears. 2 3 4 In the Known domains list box, select the domain that has the users you want to view. Choose the OK button or press ENTER. The Current Users on Domain domainname appears. This dialog box lists the users logged on in the domain you specified, and it contains the same types of information as the Current Users on Server \\computername dialog box. To view information about a user, select the username in the list box, and choose the Zoom button. The Information on user username dialog box appears. This dialog box provides more information about the user you specied. 6 7 Choose the Done button. Choose the Done button again.

39

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Understanding User Accounts

Understanding User Accounts

User accounts control access to shared resources. On a server, user accounts specify which users have access to shared resources. In a Windows NT Advanced Server or LAN Manager domain, user accounts specify which users can log on. Your account on a server includes your username and the password you must supply to gain access to the servers resources. If the password you supply when you log on matches the password in a servers account, you can use the servers resources. Otherwise, you must supply a password when connecting to a resource to gain access. Note that having an account on a server does not guarantee access to all of its resources. Your administrator can control access to each resource on a server by setting permissions for every user individually. In a Windows NT Advanced Server or LAN Manager domain, your account includes the username and password that you must supply to log on to that domain, your full name, a comment about you, and a record of the hours during which you can log on. When you log on in a domain, the domain controller or a logon server veries that the username and password you supply match those in your existing user account. In Windows NT Advanced Server domains, there are trust relationships between domains. Trust relationships let you access other domains even though you only have an account in one domain.
NOTE: To log on, the network server running the Netlogon service and the MS-DOS workstation must both run the same protocol (for example, NetBEUI), and the workstation must run this protocol as its designated first protocol. If these conditions are not met, logon requests will fail. If you are experiencing problems logging on, see your network administrator.

NOTE:

Viewing Information About User Accounts

If your workstation participates in a LAN Manager logon domain, you can view your username, account privileges, date of last logon, and logon times, among other information, as they are listed in your user account.
40

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Understanding User Accounts

To view information about your user account

1 To view information about your account in the logon domain, set the current focus on your workstation. To view information about your account at a server, set the current focus on that server. From the Accounts menu, choose Your account. The View Your Account at \\computername dialog box appears. If the current focus is set on your workstation, the computername displayed in the title of the dialog box is that of the LAN Manager primary domain controller or Windows NT Advanced Server domain controller. If the current focus is set on a server, the computername displayed in the title of the dialog box is that of the server. You can enter a comment about yourself that others on a LAN Manager network can read, such as your ofce location or phone extension, in the User Comment text box. If you are logged on to a LAN Manager domain, this comment appears after your name in the Information on User username dialog box under the Users on a server or Users on a domain command in the View menu. It also appears when you type the net who username command from the command line. The User comment eld can have as many as 48 characters. The Users on a server, Users on a domain and net who commands do not give information about Windows NT Advanced Server users or domains. The Country code number species the language in which servers display messages. For more information about country codes, see Appendix A, Country Codes. Except for the User comment and Country code text boxes, you cannot change the information in this dialog box. 3 Choose the Logon times button. The Hours You May Log Onto Server \\computername dialog box appears. The Hours You May Log Onto Server \\computername dialog box displays the times during which you can use the servers resources. Your administrator determines these times. You cannot edit any of the elds in this dialog box. 4 5 Choose the Done button. Choose the OK button.

41

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Understanding User Accounts

Changing Your Password

You sometimes have to change the password for your account--for example, when your password is about to expire. If your account information is kept on a LAN Manager server, LAN Manager alerts you when you need to change your password. See your administrator if you forget your password. If your account information is kept on a LAN Manager server, several weeks before your password expires, you will be notied when you log on that you need to change your password. It is strongly recommended that you change the password during a network session before the day the password expires. If you have not changed the password by the expiration date, you will be required to change the password in order to log on. You may then experience a delay before you are able to make network connections. (In later sessions, you will be able to make network connections as usual.) To change your password
1 To change your password in your logon domain account, set the current focus on your workstation. To change your password on a server, set the current focus on that server. From the Accounts menu, choose Change Your Password. The Change Password at \\computername dialog box appears. 3 4 5 In the Old password box, type your current password. In the New password box, type a new password. Choose the OK button.

42

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Starting LAN Manager Services

Starting LAN Manager Services

You must start the Workstation service before you can log on to the network, start any other LAN Manager service, or use the LAN Manager screen. When you start the Workstation service, LAN Manager Enhanced automatically starts the Messenger and Netpopup services. Or you can start one of these services individually--if you stopped it temporarily--by specifying its name from the command line. When you start a service, you can adjust certain aspects of its conguration. For example, you can specify a computername when starting the Workstation service, or you can specify a log le for storing messages when starting the Messenger service. These adjustments are made by including an option on the command line. Specifying an option on the command line temporarily overrides the default setting for the service. When the service stops and restarts, the default setting is restored. Always consult your administrator before including an option when starting a service. The options available with each service are listed on its Net Start reference page in Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference. To start a service
1 Type net start service [options].

For more information about starting services, see Net Start Messenger, Net Start Netpopup, and Net Start Workstation in Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference.

43

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Stopping LAN Manager Services

Stopping LAN Manager Services

When you stop the Workstation service, all network services stop, and connections to the network end. You must restart the Workstation service and log on if you want to use the network again. Alternatively, you can pause your workstation, which is similar to stopping your workstation but doesnt log you out or cancel connections. Pausing puts your workstation on hold but keeps your username and password active. It also pauses the Messenger and Netpopup services. For more information about pausing services, see Pausing LAN Manager Services, later in this chapter.
NOTE: Do not load terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) programs after the Workstation service has been loaded. LAN Manager Enhanced is a TSR program, which means that it stays in your workstation's memory even after you stop the program. If other TSR programs are loaded into your workstations memory after the Workstation service is started, the net stop command may not work. If this occurs, remove the other TSR programs and try again.

To stop the workstation service

Type net stop workstation.

For more information about stopping LAN Manager services, see Net Stop Workstation in Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference.

44

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Pausing LAN Manager Services

Pausing LAN Manager Services

You can pause all running LAN Manager services by pausing the Workstation service. Or you can pause services individually by specifying the service name from the command line. Pausing a service puts it on hold. Unlike stopping, pausing does not cancel connections or change settings. When you pause the Workstation service, you can use your computers devicenames for local resources instead of shared resources. For example, the LPT1: devicename might be assigned to a shared printer queue. By pausing the Workstation service, you can use the devicename for a printer attached to the LPT1 port on your computer. To pause a service
Type net pause service.

For more information about pausing a service, see Net Pause in Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference.

45

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Continuing LAN Manager Services

Continuing LAN Manager Services

When you continue a service, it resumes running as it was before you paused it. To continue a service
Type net continue service.

For more information about continuing a service, see Net Continue in Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference.

46

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Pausing and Continuing Connections to Resources

Pausing and Continuing Connections to Resources

In addition to pausing a service, you can pause your workstation's connections to shared directories and printer queues. When you pause connections, your workstation no longer recognizes the devicenames assigned to the connections. If you assigned a local devicename to a network connection (for example, LPT1), pausing the connection lets you use the devicename for a local resource. You use the drdr option with the net pause and net continue commands to pause and continue connections to shared directories. You use the prdr option to pause and continue connections to shared printer queues. To pause and continue connections to shared directories or printer queues
Pause connections to shared directories or printer queues by typing: net pause {drdr | prdr} Continue connections to shared directories or printer queues by typing: net continue {drdr | prdr}

For more information about using these options, see Net Pause and Net Continue in Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference.

47

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Viewing the Workstation Conguration

Viewing the Workstation Configuration

Your workstation conguration includes information such as your username and the domains that you participate in. To view your workstation's conguration
1 From the Config menu, select Workstation options. The View Conguration dialog box appears. Xs in the Messenger and Netpopup elds mean the services are running. You cannot change these elds in this dialog box. 2 Choose the Done button.

48

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Using Home Directories

Using Home Directories

Your administrator may have set aside a directory on a remote server for your own personal use. This directory is your home directory. For a LAN Manager Enhanced workstation, you can assign a drive letter to your home directory with the command:
net use drive: /home

You can use your home directory to store les, create and remove subdirectories, and perform any other tasks that you ordinarily perform with a directory on your workstation. Your administrator can also set LAN Manager permissions for les and subdirectories, allowing other people to use the contents of your home directory. Your administrator can also monitor the disk space used for your home directory. For information about permissions, see Net Access and Net Use in Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference.

49

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Exiting the LAN Manager Screen

Exiting the LAN Manager Screen

Exiting the LAN Manager screen returns you to the MS-DOS prompt but does not log you off from the network or stop LAN Manager Enhanced services. From the command line, you can still use the connections you set up with the LAN Manager screen. For more information about using the command line, see Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference. To exit the LAN Manager screen
1 2 Press ESC to close each open dialog box. Do one of the following: Press ALT+F4. From the View menu, choose Exit.

The LAN Manager screen disappears, and the MS-DOS prompt appears on your workstation's screen. To restart the LAN Manager screen
Type net.

50

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Quitting LAN Manager Enhanced

Quitting LAN Manager Enhanced

Quitting LAN Manager Enhanced involves two steps:
Logging off from the network Stopping the Workstation service

Logging off from the network is described in the next section. For details on stopping the Workstation service, see Stopping LAN Manager Services, earlier in this chapter.

Logging Off from the Network

Logging off from the network removes your username and password from your workstation and cancels any existing connections to shared resources, but it does not stop LAN Manager Enhanced services. Log off when you wont be using your workstation for a while. That way, no one else can use your identity and your workstation to access resources. To log off from the network
1 From the Config menu, choose Log off from LAN. If you are connected to shared resources on the network, the logoff message box appears. 2 To continue logging off, choose the OK button. The conrmation message box appears. 3 Choose the OK button.

After you log off, you cant use any shared resources. However, the Workstation service is still running. If you are still using the LAN Manager screen, you can log on again from the screen. To log on again
1 From the Config menu, choose Log on to LAN. The Log Onto Network message box appears.

51

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Quitting LAN Manager Enhanced

2 3

In the Password box, type your password. Choose the OK button, and then press ENTER.

To log on again from the MS-DOS prompt

1 Type net. The Log Onto Network message box appears. 2 3 In the Password box, type your password. Choose the OK button, and then press ENTER.

52

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Starting LAN Manager Enhanced Automatically

Starting LAN Manager Enhanced Automatically

LAN Manager Enhanced commands that you can type at the MS-DOS prompt can be put in a batch program so that they run automatically. A batch program contains groups of commands. When you run a batch program, you can perform a series of tasks without typing their individual commands. To start the Workstation service when you start your workstation, put the following command in the AUTOEXEC.BAT le (before any other network-related commands):
net start workstation NOTE: To maintain network security, do not put your password in a batch program.

To learn more about batch programs, see your MS-DOS manual(s). For more information about LAN Manager Enhanced commands, see Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference.

53

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Running Other Network Protocols

Running Other Network Protocols

The computer resources you need may be on more than one network, each of which uses its own communications protocol. Demand Protocol Architecture (DPA) allows you to load a protocol when you need to connect your workstation to a resource on the network that uses that protocol, and then unload it when you are done, thereby freeing your workstations memory for other tasks. Your network administrator can tell you whether you will need to use DPA and the names of the protocols being used. To load a protocol
Type load protocol.

To unload the last-loaded protocol and break the connection

Type unload protocol.

To view a list of loaded protocols

Type load /i.

You may be using a permanently loaded protocol that cannot be dynamically loaded or unloaded. Permanently loaded protocols will not appear in response to the load /i command. If you want one or more protocols to always load when you start your workstation, include the load command in your AUTOEXEC.BAT le (after the net start workstation line).

54

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Using the TEMP Environment Variable

Using the TEMP Environment Variable

If you are using MS-DOS version 5.0 and want to set the temp environment variable to an HPFS386 drive on a remote server, be sure you have Create permission on that drive. This is not an issue if you are using a version of MS-DOS earlier than version 5.0, or if you are using a non-HPFS386 drive.

55

Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Using the TEMP Environment Variable

56

Using Shared Directories

A shared directory is a disk directory on a server that contains les to which users on a network have access. Using a shared directory, one person can write a report, another person can review it, and a third person can format and print it, all without passing a oppy disk around the ofce.
57

Using Shared Directories

This chapter explains how to use shared directories. It includes procedures for viewing, connecting to, and disconnecting from a shared directory, and for seeing which shared directories your workstation is connected to. In addition, the command-line syntax for moving and copying les over the network is provided.

58

Using Shared Directories Viewing Shared Directories

Viewing Shared Directories

The rst step in using a shared directory is seeing which directories and other resources are available to you. To see which shared resources are available to you, the Workstation service must be running, and you must be logged on to the network. For information about starting the Workstation service and logging on, see Chapter 1, Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced. Once you start the Workstation service and log on to the network, you can use the LAN Manager screen to display a list of the servers you can view. This list includes servers in your workstation domain, your logon domain, and other domains (if any) specied in the LANMAN.INI le. The LANMAN.INI le is an initialization le that determines default settings for workstations on a network.
To view shared directories 1 2 In the list of servers on the LAN Manager screen, set the current focus on the server that has shared directories you want to view. From the View menu, choose Available resources. The Resources Available at \\computername dialog box appears. Shared directories are listed as Disk in the Type column. 3 Choose the Done button.

59

Using Shared Directories Connecting to a Shared Directory

Connecting to a Shared Directory

Connecting to a shared directory allows you to use the directory as if it were a disk drive on your workstation. When you connect to a shared directory, you can use les or programs in that directory. You can also copy les or programs to the directory for use by others. When you connect to a shared directory, you assign a devicename to the directory. A devicename is a name by which your computer identies a device. In this case, the device is the disk drive the directory you are connected to is on. A disk drive devicename is a letter followed by a colon.
To connect your workstation to a shared directory 1 2 Set the current focus on the server with the shared directory you want to use. From the View menu, choose Available resources. The Resources Available at \\computername dialog box appears. The list box displays available resources on the server you specied. Shared directories are listed as Disk in the Type column. 3 4 In the list box, select the directory to which you want to connect. Choose the Use Resource button. The Use the resource \\computername\sharename dialog box appears. LAN Manager Enhanced provides the next available devicename in the Local device text box, but you can type a different devicename over the one that appears. 5 6 7 In the Password text box, type a password if needed. Choose the OK button. Choose the Done button.

Your workstation connects to the directory you selected. You can now use the directory the same way you use your workstations disk drives. The connection exists as a logical disk drive on your workstation.

60

Using Shared Directories Connecting to a Shared Directory

Connecting to a Shared Directory Without Setting the Focus

The LAN Manager screen allows you to connect your workstation to shared directories on servers other than the server of current focus. This includes servers that are not visible on the LAN Manager screen and servers in other domains. LAN Manager Enhanced also lets you connect your workstation to servers on the network that are not running LAN Manager. Because nonLAN Manager servers have different interfaces, their computernames do not appear on the LAN Manager screen. Instead, you connect by specifying each servers path in a dialog box. To connect to a directory on a server other than the server of current focus
1 From the View menu, choose Used resources. The Resources in Use by username at \\computername dialog box appears. 2 Choose the Add use button. The Use a Network Resource dialog box appears. LAN Manager Enhanced preselects Disk in the Type of Use box and provides the next available devicename in the Local device box. You can type a different devicename over the one that appears. 3 4 5 6 In the Network resource box, type the network path of the shared directory for example, \\computername\sharename In the Password box, type a password if needed. Choose the OK button. Choose the Done button.

Controlling Persistent Connections

If you often use the same connections (for example, you connect to the same printer every day), having LAN Manager save and restore your connections can save you time and trouble. LAN Manager provides the persistent connections feature, which saves the connections you have when you log off and restores them the next time you log on (if the resources are currently available).

61

Using Shared Directories Connecting to a Shared Directory

You use the net use command to control the persistent connections feature. By default, the persistent connections feature is turned on. To change the settings for persistent connections
Type net use /p[ersistent]:{yes | no | freeze | save}. The yes setting saves all connections as they are made, and restores them the next time you log on. This is the default setting. The no setting does not save or restore connections. The freeze setting stops saving connections. The save setting saves your current connections, overwriting any previously saved connections. These settings will be restored each time you log on. Connections made after using the net use /p:save command are neither saved nor restored.

Connecting to an IBM LAN Server Resource

If the directory you are connecting to is on an IBM LAN Server, it may be known by an alias. The alias is a short name that replaces the full path to the resource. To use the resource from LAN Manager, you must supply the full path, since LAN Manager does not support this naming convention.

Making a Onetime Connection to a Shared Directory

You can use a shared directory without assigning a devicename to the connection. For example, to use Microsoft Word to edit the LIST.DOC le in the shared directory with the network path \\SALES\FARWEST, start Word and load the le by typing
word \\sales\farwest\list.doc

Microsoft Word loads the shared le even though you havent made a previous connection to \\SALES\FARWEST. Note that this procedure doesnt work when you need a password to gain access to \\SALES\FARWEST. In this case, you must rst establish access to the directory.

62

Using Shared Directories Connecting to a Shared Directory

If You Have Trouble Connecting

When you try to connect, you may see this error message:
SYS0071: The network request was not accepted.

This may mean that the server has reached its limit for simultaneous connections or there may be some problem with the server or with your account. Contact your network administrator for help. In rare cases, you may get an out of resources message. If this happens, you probably need to increase the values for the sessions and ncbs keywords in the LANMAN.INI le. See the Installation Guide for Clients for more information on the LANMAN.INI le.

63

Using Shared Directories Viewing Your Connections to Shared Directories

Viewing Your Connections to Shared Directories

You can view directories connected to your workstation anytime during a working session. To view directories connected to your workstation
1 From the View menu, choose Used resources. The Resources in Use by username at \\computername dialog box appears. Devicenames D: through Z: in the Device column identify connections to shared directories. 2 Choose the Done button.

64

Using Shared Directories Copying Files over the Network

Copying Files over the Network

Use the net copy command to copy a le over the network, to or from your workstation, or between servers. The MS-DOS copy command can be used in place of net copy, but net copy is faster when both the source and the destination are on the same server. You can only copy les from the MS-DOS prompt. To copy a le
Type net copy source [destination] For example: net copy \\product\lists\sales.doc \\product\reports

For more information about copying les, see Net Copy in Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference.

65

Using Shared Directories Moving Files over the Network

Moving Files over the Network

Use the net move command to move a le over the network, to or from your workstation, or between servers. You can only move les from the MS-DOS prompt. The net move command differs from the net copy command in that it deletes a le at its source location when it moves the le. To move a le
Type net move source [destination] If no destination is specied, the le moves to the current directory.

For more information about moving les, see Net Move in Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference.

66

Using Shared Directories Running a Program on a Server

Running a Program on a Server

NOTE: The netrun command can be used on LAN Manager OS/2 and UNIX servers, but not on Windows NT Advanced Servers or Windows NT workstations. It cannot be used to run interactive programs such as word processors or spreadsheets.

Use the netrun command to run a program on a LAN Manager OS/2 or UNIX server. You can run a program on a server only from the command line. The server must be congured to accept remote program requests. See your administrator for help using this command. To use the netrun command
1 2 3 Connect to a shared directory on the server with the net use command. Change your current directory to the shared directory. Type netrun followed by the filename of the program and any options or variables the program requires.

When you use netrun, the program output is sent to your screen unless you use the operating-system redirection symbol to send information to a le. To send information to a le, include >pathname in the netrun command line. If the program being run has options or variables that include lenames, specify the full path for each le. If a drive letter is included in the path, LAN Manager assumes its one of the servers drives. For more information about running a program on a server, see Netrun in Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference or Chapter 7, Basic Reference.

67

Using Shared Directories Disconnecting from a Shared Directory

Disconnecting from a Shared Directory

You can disconnect your workstation from a shared directory when you nish using a resource, or when you want to use the devicename for a different connection. To disconnect your workstation from a shared directory
1 From the View menu, choose Used resources. The Resources in Use by username at \\computername dialog box appears. 2 3 4 5 Select the shared directory that you want to disconnect your workstation from. Choose the Stop using button. When prompted for confirmation, choose the OK button. Choose the Done button.

68

Using Shared Printers

With LAN Manager, you can print les by sending them from your workstation to shared printers through shared printer queues. This chapter explains shared printer queues and how to view, connect to, control, and disconnect from them.
69

Using Shared Printers Printer Queues

Printer Queues
A shared printer is a printer available to network users on a server. Users send their print jobs to the server, which passes them to a printer queue, where they are held until they are ready to print. Jobs sent to a printer queue print, one by one, usually in the order received. Printer queues can be set up in two ways: One printer can handle jobs from several queues, or one queue can send jobs to several similar printers. When a single printer receives jobs from several queues, the queues can have different priorities for printing. The printer might receive requests from a low-priority queue that accepts jobs from all network users, as well as from a high-priority queue that accepts jobs only from users who need les printed quickly. When several printers receive jobs from a single queue, the server controlling the queue informs users which printer printed their jobs. If the Messenger and Netpopup (or Winpopup or Minipop) services are running on your workstation, a message appears when your print job is printed. For information about the Messenger and Netpopup services, see Chapter 4, Sending and Receiving Messages.

70

Using Shared Printers Viewing Printer Queues and Print Jobs

Viewing Printer Queues and Print Jobs

When you view a list of available printer queues, you can determine where to send a print job, or you can monitor jobs that you sent to a particular queue. You cannot view the queue of an MS-DOS workstation running the LAN Manager Print Station utility. To view printer queues and their print jobs
1 2 Set the current focus on the server sharing the printer queue that you want to view. From the View menu, choose Printer queues. The Print Queues on \\computername dialog box appears. The Print Queues on \\computername dialog box displays the name, the number of waiting print jobs, and the status of each queue on the server you specied. Each print job is identied with a line containing the username, job number (assigned by the server), size of the job (in bytes), and status of the job. When the list box containing the information about printer queues is more than one page long, scroll through the list to view its entire contents. 3 Choose the Done button.

71

Using Shared Printers Connecting to a Printer Queue

Connecting to a Printer Queue

Connecting to a printer queue allows you to use the queue as if a printer were attached directly to your workstation. You connect to a printer queue by assigning a devicename to the queue. You can use devicenames LPT1 through LPT3. The procedure in this section is for connecting to printer queues on servers on which you can set the current focus. To connect to other queues, see the next section. To connect your workstation to a printer queue
1 2 Set the current focus on the server sharing the printer queue that you want to use. From the View menu, choose Available resources. The Resources Available at \\computername dialog box appears. Printer queues are listed as Printer in the Type column. 3 4 Select the printer queue that you want to use. Choose the Use resource button. The Use the resource \\computername\sharename dialog box appears. LAN Manager Enhanced provides the next available devicename in the Local device box, but you can type a different devicename over the one that appears. 5 6 7 In the Password box, type a password if needed. Choose the OK button. Choose the Done button.

Connecting to Printer Queues Without Setting the Focus

The LAN Manager screen allows you to connect your workstation to printer queues on servers other than the server of current focus. This includes servers that are not visible on the LAN Manager screen, servers in other domains, and MS-DOS workstations running the LAN Manager Print Station utility.

72

Using Shared Printers Connecting to a Printer Queue

LAN Manager Enhanced also lets you connect your workstation to servers on the network that are not running Windows NT or LAN Manager. Because these servers have different interfaces, their names do not appear on the LAN Manager screen. Instead, you can connect by specifying the servers path in a dialog box. To connect to a printer queue on a server other than the server of current focus
1 From the View menu, choose Used resources. The Resources in Use by username at \\computername dialog box appears. 2 Choose the Add use button. The Use a Network Resource dialog box appears. 3 In the Type of Use list box, select the 2 Printer option button. LAN Manager Enhanced provides the next available devicename in the Local device box, but you can type a different devicename over the one that appears. 4 In the Network resource box, type the network path of the printer queue you want to use. For example, to connect to the LASER queue on the \\ADMIN server, type: \\admin\laser To connect to a LAN Manager Print Station queue on an MS-DOS workstation, use LPT as the sharename. For example, to connect to the queue on the workstation \\WILDWOOD, type: \\WILDWOOD\LPT 5 6 7 In the Password box, type a password if needed. Choose the OK button. Choose the Done button.

Making a Onetime Connection to a Printer Queue

You dont have to assign a devicename to a printer queue if you only want to print one le. You can copy the le directly to a printer queue by specifying the network path as the destination of the net copy command.

73

Using Shared Printers Connecting to a Printer Queue

For example, if your current directory contains the PHONE.LST le and you want to send the le to the HOLES printer queue on the \\ADMIN server, type:
net copy phone.lst \\admin\holes

LAN Manager Enhanced connects your workstation to the printer queue and copies the le to the queue for printing. After copying, the connection cancels. Note that this procedure doesnt work when you need a password to gain access to \\ADMIN\HOLES. In this case, you must rst connect to the queue by assigning it a devicename.

Printing over the Network

After you connect to a printer queue, you can use a printer queue as if a printer were attached to your workstation. You simply direct your print job to the devicename that you assigned to the queue. Many applications print to LPT1 by default. In addition, you can send a le to print with MS-DOS commands by using the devicename assigned to the queue in the syntax for the command for example:
copy report.doc lpt2:

Or
print /d:lpt2 report.doc

For more information about using the MS-DOS copy and print commands, see your MS-DOS manual(s).

74

Using Shared Printers Viewing Your Connections to Printer Queues

Viewing Your Connections to Printer Queues

You can view the printer queues connected to your workstation anytime during a working session. To view your workstations connections to printer queues
1 From the View menu, choose Used resources. The Resources in Use by username at \\computername dialog box appears. If you have a connection to a printer queue, you see an LPT devicename under the Device column. 2 Choose the Done button.

75

Using Shared Printers Holding, Releasing, and Deleting a Print Job

Holding, Releasing, and Deleting a Print Job

Holding a print job instructs the server to suspend printing until you release it. Deleting a print job removes it from the queue. Your administrator can also hold, delete, or restart a print job. These actions may be necessary when a problem with the printer, such as a paper jam, causes printing to stop. To hold a print job
1 2 Set the current focus on the server sharing the queue with the print job you want to hold. From the View menu, choose Printer queues. The Print Queues on \\computername dialog box appears. 3 4 5 Select the print job that you want to hold. Choose the Hold button. Choose the Done button.

The job remains on hold until you release it. To release a print job
1 2 Set the current focus on the server sharing the queue with the print job you want to release. From the View menu, choose Printer queues. The Print Queues on \\computername dialog box appears. 3 4 5 Select the print job you want to release. Choose the Release button. Choose the Done button.

To delete a print job

1 2 Set the current focus on the server sharing the queue with the print job you want to delete. From the View menu, choose Printer queues. The Print Queues on \\computername dialog box appears. 76

Using Shared Printers Holding, Releasing, and Deleting a Print Job

3 4 5 6

Select the print job you want to delete. Choose the Delete button. When prompted for confirmation, choose the OK button. Choose the Done button.

77

Using Shared Printers Disconnecting from a Shared Printer Queue

Disconnecting from a Shared Printer Queue

You can disconnect your workstation from a printer queue when you nish using the printer, or when you want to use the devicename for a different connection. To disconnect your workstation from a printer queue
1 From the View menu, choose Used resources. The Resources in Use by username at \\computername dialog box appears. 2 3 4 5 Select the printer queue that you want to disconnect your workstation from. Choose the Stop using button. When prompted for confirmation, choose the OK button. Choose the Done button.

If a Print Job Fails to Send an End-of-Job Signal

In some cases, an application may not send an end-of-job signal that is recognized by the print spooler. Without this signal, the spooler cannot pass the job to the printer, and the spooler is not free to accept other jobs. The prtsc utility solves this problem. The prtsc utility is a terminate-andstay-resident (TSR) program. To load this utility, type:
prtsc

at the command line. To load the utility automatically, include it in the wrkservices entry and also in the [services] section of the LANMAN.INI le. For example, if prtsc is included in the wrkservices entry:
wrkservices = messenger,netpopup,prtsc,encrypt

then the [services] section should include the following:

prtsc = netprog\prtsc.exe

If the workstation has prtsc loaded, you can release the print job by pressing CTRL+ALT+PRINT SCREEN.

78

Using Shared Printers Disconnecting from a Shared Printer Queue

LAN Manager Enhanced workstations also have a time-out feature that sends an end-of-job signal if no data is sent to the spooler within a specied time.

79

Using Shared Printers Managing a Shared Printer

Managing a Shared Printer

NOTE: Read this section only if a shared printer is attached to your workstation. If you have a printer attached to your workstation, but are unsure if it is a shared printer, ask your administrator.

If a shared printer is attached to your workstation, follow the guidelines in the next section when using the printer. These guidelines not only ensure that you get the most out of your printer but also ensure that it is accessible to users at other workstations on the network. In addition to following these guidelines, you and your administrator often share responsibility for managing the shared printer. This section describes the following: Information on troubleshooting shared printers is provided in Appendix D, Troubleshooting.
Guidelines for using a shared printer attached to your workstation Your administrators responsibilities for managing a shared printer Your responsibilities for managing a shared printer Maintaining a link to the server Disabling and enabling the printer

Recommendations for Using a Shared Printer

Follow these recommendations when using your shared printer:
Access your printer as a shared resource rather than a local resource. Accessing the printer as a shared resource enables you to: Hold print jobs. Supply reset sequences for the printer. Print banner pages. Use the server as a personal print spooler, queueing jobs before printing.

Always use an unused port ID when you link to the printer queue on the server. Using the port ID that connects your printer to your workstation will prevent your

80

Using Shared Printers Managing a Shared Printer

job and other jobs from printing. For example, if you have a shared printer attached to the LPT1 (or PRN) port on your workstation, link to the printer queue (or to other shared printer queues) using LPT2 or another port ID. If you must use your printer locally, use the MS-DOS print command, or disable the printer as a network resource and use it locally. For more information about the MS-DOS print command, see your MS-DOS manual. For information on disabling the printer, see Disabling and Enabling the Printer, later in this section.

Administrators Responsibilities
Your administrator is often responsible for connecting the shared printer to your computer and ensuring that the appropriate LAN Manager Spooler Agent software is automatically loaded on your workstation. LAN Manager supports three workstation print spooling programs:
The LAN Manager Print Station utility (printsta command) shares a workstations printer with one other workstation at a time, without involvement of a server. The LAN Manager Clispool program (the clispool command) supports the print spooler (the print command) that comes with MS-DOS. This program is only available if you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. The LAN Manager Clipcach program (the clipcach command) supports the print spooler that comes with LaserTools PrintCache version 2.4a. This program is only available if you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network.

NOTE:

LaserTools PrintCache must be purchased separately.

The Clispool and Clipcach programs receive print jobs sent through the server from workstations and pass them to the appropriate print spooling program for printing. For more information about the clispool and clipcach commands, see Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference. For more information about the LaserTools PrintCache software, see the LaserTools PrintCache manual. With clispool and clipcach your administrator is also responsible for maintaining the printer queue (including such tasks as deleting jobs from other users) and for setting printer parameters.

81

Using Shared Printers Managing a Shared Printer

For more information about the printsta command, see Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference.
NOTE: The Print Station utility cannot be added simultaneously with clispool or clipcach; they are mutually exclusive.

Your Responsibilities
You are responsible for the following tasks:
Maintaining the printers link to the server (for clispool or clipcach) Disabling the printer when necessary

When you use the LAN Manager Print Station utility, you are fully responsible for the printer; print jobs come directly to your workstation and not through an intermediary server. The remainder of this section provides information for maintaining the printer as a shared resource. Of course, the printer also requires the same routine maintenance any printer requires, such as maintaining the paper supply and replacing the ribbon or toner. For information about routine printer maintenance, see the guide packaged with your printer.
Maintaining the Link to the Server for Clispool or Clipcach

When a user sends a print job to the shared printer connected to your workstation, the server automatically establishes a link between itself and your workstation. This link uses the drive identication specied by your administrator. You do not need to establish this link yourself. When you boot your workstation and automatically load the printing programs, the drive identication used for shared printing is displayed, along with a copyright notice. Do not use this drive identication for another link, because you might disrupt a print job. Disabling and Enabling the Printer You can disable the printer by turning it off or by using the clispool or clipcach command, depending on which print spooler you use. You may need to turn your printer off if it needs to be serviced. You may want to disable your printer using the clispool or clipcach command if you need

82

Using Shared Printers Managing a Shared Printer

exclusive use of the printer or if you must use the printer locally. The printer queue continues to accept jobs, but the jobs will not print until you re-enable the printer.
NOTE: If you want to use your printer locally without disabling it, use the print command. For example, type print myfile. At most, one print job from the server may print before your job is printed.

Turning Off the Power If you turn off your workstation or printer, any print jobs sent to the printer will accumulate in the printer queue on the server. These jobs will start printing when your workstation and printer are turned on again. To disable the printer
Type clispool /d or clipcach /d and press ENTER.

To enable the printer

Type clispool /e or clipcach /e and press ENTER.

Using the Print Station Utility

When the LAN Manager Print Station utility is started on a workstation, the workstation appears as a server to the network. This allows other users to connect to the printer, as they would to any other network printer. However, you cannot view the queue with the net view command. In the default implementation of LAN Manager Print Station, print jobs are written to a le on the host computer (the one running printsta) and then sent to the printer. This process, called spooling, allows the person sending the print job to regain control of his or her computer without waiting for the job to print. If the disk space for temporary print les is not available, you can load LAN Manager Print Station with spooling disabled. Printing takes place as a background task on the host computer; the person using that workstation will not be interrupted by print jobs from other users. The Netpopup or Winpopup utility sends messages to the host workstation when the LAN Manager Print Station encounters errors such as printer out of paper.

83

Using Shared Printers Managing a Shared Printer

If you load Print Station in nonspooling mode, or if print jobs will be spooled from workstations running OS/2, you should not have messages sent to the host workstation. Loading Print Station in nonspooling mode automatically disables Netpopup or Winpopup. If jobs will be spooled from workstations running OS/2, disable Netpopup or Winpopup manually. Disabling and Enabling the Printer You can disable the printer by turning it off or by using the printsta command. You may need to turn your printer off if it needs to be serviced. You may want to disable your printer using the printsta /d command if you need exclusive use of the printer or if you must use the printer locally. The printer queue continues to accept jobs, but the jobs will not print until you re-enable the printer. For more information, see Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference, or Chapter 7, Basic Reference.

84

Sending and Receiving Messages

With LAN Manager Enhanced, you can exchange messages with other network users. Servers can send you messages about conditions that require your attention. You can store your messages in a message log.

85

Sending and Receiving Messages

Workstations using several local area network adapters can exchange messages only through the rst adapter. This chapter discusses how to use the message features of LAN Manager Enhanced and provides procedures for sending a message or le, reading and managing your message log, and adding or deleting an alias.
NOTE: Do not run the Messenger service on workstations running Norton Commander 3.0. If messages are received at such a workstation, the computer will halt or reboot itself.

86

Sending and Receiving Messages Sending Messages

Sending Messages
The Messenger service does not have to be running for you to send a message. However, it must be running for your workstation to receive messages. You can send a message to an alias on the network or to a domain. An alias is a unique name that each user species. A workstation can have three kinds of aliases:
A computername, which becomes an alias for a workstation when the workstation is added to the network An alias added with the Aliases command from the Message menu or with the net name command from the command line A username

A username does not necessarily become an alias when a user logs on to the network. This is because an alias must be unique on the network, but a user can be logged on at more than one workstation at a time. If a user logs on at several workstations, the username becomes an alias only at the rst workstation where the user logs on. A domain name is used like an alias for sending messages to a domain. All the workstations and servers that specify a domain as their workstation domain receive messages sent to the domain name.
To send a message 1 From the Message menu, select Send a typed message. The Send a Message dialog box appears. LAN Manager preselects the Name option. 2 To send a message to a user, type that users alias in the Name box. If you are sending a message to more than one user, separate the aliases with a space. If you want a copy of the message, specify your own alias too. 3 4 To send a message to all the users in a domain, select the Domain option, and type the domain name. In the Message box, type your message.

87

Sending and Receiving Messages Sending Messages

The messages you send to all the users in a domain cannot exceed 128 characters. 5 Choose the OK button.

88

Sending and Receiving Messages Reading Messages

Reading Messages
To receive messages from other users and from servers on the network, the Messenger service must be started. The Netpopup service must be started if you want messages to be displayed when you receive them.
NOTE: If you are using LAN Manager with Microsoft Windows, your administrator may have configured your workstation to display messages only when the Windows operating system is running. If you are not seeing messages (from other network users or printer notifications, for example), see your administrator for information on how to change the configuration so that your workstation will display messages.

When your workstation receives a message, the Netpopup service displays the message in a message box on your screen for 1 minute. If the Netpopup service is paused, you can read your messages in the message log. If your workstation isnt running the Netpopup and Messenger services, you cant read the messages you receive, but your workstation beeps when a message arrives. There are two ways to read messages: with the Netpopup service or in your message log. The message log is a le that stores your messages when theyre received. By default, LAN Manager Enhanced stores messages in the MESSAGES.LOG le in the LANMAN.DOS\LOGS directory. Each workstation has its own message log.

Using the Netpopup Service

When both the Messenger and Netpopup services are running, each new message appears in a message box on your screen. The following is a typical message box: To remove a message box from the screen, press ESC. Otherwise, the message box appears for one minute, and then disappears. When you install LAN Manager on a workstation running the Microsoft Windows operating system, the LAN Manager Setup program installs the Winpopup utility instead of Netpopup. For details about Winpopup, see the Users Guide for Microsoft Windows Clients.

89

Sending and Receiving Messages Reading Messages

If you ordinarily work only in Microsoft Windows and do not need Netpopup functionality in the MS-DOS environment, you can replace Winpopup with the smaller Minipop utility to save memory. To replace Winpopup with Minipop
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Exit the Windows operating system. From your LAN Manager root directory, type setup. From the Configuration menu, choose Workstation settings. Make sure Yes is selected under Messaging Services, and then choose the OK button. In the Support for the Windows Environment dialog box, Yes should be selected. In the Messaging Popups dialog box, change the selection to Only while the Windows environment is running. In the Configuration Complete dialog box, choose the Save button.

Your changes will take effect the next time you start the Workstation service.

Reading Your Message Log

The message log is a le that stores a workstations messages. When a workstation receives messages for more than one user or alias, all the messages are stored in the same message log. To read your message log
1 From the Message menu, choose Read message log file. The Contents of Current Message Log dialog box appears. Scroll through the list box to read your messages. 2 3 4 To delete the contents of the current message log from the message log file, choose the Clear log button. When prompted for confirmation, choose the OK button. Choose the Done button.

90

Sending and Receiving Messages Reading Messages

Renaming the Message Log File

You can change the name of your message log by specifying a new path in a dialog box. To change the name of the message log
1 From the Message menu, choose Log messages to file. The Specify Message Log File dialog box appears. 2 In the New file box, type the path of the new file, or use the Contents of path list box and the Dir button to select an existing filename. If you do not specify a path, the new log is stored in the LANMAN.DOS\LOGS directory. If you type a lename without an extension, LAN Manager Enhanced attaches the .LOG extension. 3 Choose the OK button.

Stopping and Starting Message Logging

You can stop and restart message logging. To stop message logging
1 From the Message menu, choose Log messages to file. The Specify Message Log File dialog box appears. 2 Press the SPACEBAR to select the Pause message logging check box. (An X in the check box means message logging pauses.) 3 Choose the OK button.

To restart message logging

1 From the Message menu, choose Log messages to file. The Specify Message Log File dialog box appears. 2 3 Clear the Pause message logging check box by pressing the SPACEBAR. Choose the OK button.

91

Sending and Receiving Messages Reading Messages

Printing Messages
Instead of storing your messages in a message log, you can print your messages as soon as they arrive. Note that you cannot print and then store messages. Messages that are printed are not stored in the message log. To print messages as they arrive
Type net log devicename.

To resume storing messages in a message log

Type net log [drive:path] filename.

For more information about printing messages, see Net Log in Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference.

92

Sending and Receiving Messages Using Aliases

Using Aliases
More than one person can receive messages at the same workstation. But because only one user can log on to a workstation at a time, you have to add an alias for every other person receiving messages at your workstation. You cant add an alias that is already in use at another workstation. Aliases are deleted when the Messenger service stops. Therefore, each time you restart the Messenger service, you have to add all the aliases you want on your workstation. You may want to create a batch le that uses the net name command to add a list of aliases. For more information, see Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference.

Adding an Alias
You add an alias to your workstation by typing the alias in a dialog box. An alias can have as many as 15 characters.
NOTE: Your administrator may need to make changes to the [messenger] section of the LANMAN.INI file if you want to add an alias.

To add an alias to a workstation

1 From the Message menu, choose Aliases. The Aliases for Messaging dialog box appears. 2 Choose the Add Alias button. The Add an Alias dialog box appears. 3 4 5 In the New alias box, type a new alias. Choose the OK button. Choose the Done button.

Deleting an Alias
You can delete an alias on your workstation, or you can delete an alias that is forwarded to your workstation.

93

Sending and Receiving Messages Using Aliases

To delete an alias from the workstation

1 From the Message menu, choose Aliases. The Aliases for Messaging dialog box appears. 2 3 4 NOTE: Select the alias that you want to delete. Choose the Delete button. Choose the Done button.

You cannot delete a workstations computername from the alias list.

94

Enhanced Reference
This chapter contains a reference page for every LAN Manager Enhanced command and utility. Each page describes the purpose and syntax of the command or utility.

95

Enhanced Reference Abbreviating Commands and Options

Abbreviating Commands and Options

The reference pages in this chapter spell out all command and service names. If a command can be abbreviated, its abbreviation is listed on the reference page for the command. You can abbreviate any command option by typing enough letters to distinguish it from the commands other options.

96

Enhanced Reference Using the /Yes and /No Options

Using the /Yes and /No Options

Many LAN Manager Enhanced commands require conrmation to complete a task. To expedite this conrmation, you can append the /yes or /no option to the command. The /yes and /no options can be abbreviated /y and /n. For example, the net logon command logs you on to the network. But when another user is already logged on at the workstation you are using, you must log off that user before you can log on. To log on at a workstation at which another user is also logged on (your username is chrisj and your password is daffodil), type:
net logon chrisj daffodil

Be careful that no one sees your password. So that no one sees your password as you type, you can use an asterisk (*) instead of your password. In this example you would type:
net logon chrisj *

LAN Manager Enhanced returns a series of prompts asking you to conrm logging off the current user and canceling the workstations existing connections and prompting you for your password. You must respond to the yes/no prompt by typing y or pressing ENTER before you can proceed with the logon. To log on without prompts, add the /y option to the net logon command. Type:
net logon chrisj daffodil /y

Remember, you can protect your password by substituting an asterisk (*). In this example, you would type:
net logon chrisj * /y

97

Enhanced Reference Using Passwords with Commands

Using Passwords with Commands

Some commands require a password to connect to a shared resource. With LAN Manager Enhanced, there are two ways to supply a password:
Type the password with the command. For example, to provide the password petunia while assigning LPT1 to the LISTS shared directory on the \\ADMIN server, type: net use lpt1: \\admin\lists petunia Type an asterisk (*) instead of the password. When you type an asterisk instead of a password, LAN Manager Enhanced prompts you for the password. For example, type: net use lpt1: \\admin\lists * LAN Manager Enhanced then displays this prompt: Type the password for \\ADMIN\LISTS: When you type the password at this prompt, the letters are not displayed. This keeps the password condential.

98

Enhanced Reference Controlling a Screen Display

Controlling a Screen Display

Some commands (for example, net help) produce more than one screenful of text. In these cases, the screen scrolls automatically until you stop it. To stop the display from scrolling
Press PAUSE or CTRL+S.

To resume scrolling
Press any key.

You can also use the MS-DOS more command to scroll one screen at a time. For example, to display one screenful of Help text at a time, type:
net help start workstation | more

Be sure to type the vertical bar, or pipe. To display another screenful, press any key at the --More-- prompt.

99

Enhanced Reference Using Commands in Batch Programs

Using Commands in Batch Programs

LAN Manager Enhanced commands can be used in batch programs (.BAT les), such as AUTOEXEC.BAT. For example, you can group the commands for starting the Workstation service, logging on to the network, and making network connections in one executable program. Command options can also be included in batch programs. To avoid confusion, do not abbreviate command options when putting commands in a batch program.
NOTE: To maintain network security, do not put your password in a batch program. Instead, use an asterisk (*) where the password would go, to be prompted for the password when the batch program is run. The password will not be displayed as you type it.

100

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Command and Utility Summary

The following lists describe the LAN Manager Enhanced commands and utilities. Using the Network
To Log on Log off Change your password Start the LAN Manager screen Assign a drive letter to your home directory on a server Connect to a shared resource Disconnect from a shared resource Copy les from a source to a destination Move les from a source to a destination Run a program or command on a LAN Manager OS/2 or UNIX system server Send a message or short le to other users on the network Control print jobs Synchronize your workstation clock with the server or domain clock Load a different network protocol Bind a protocol that has been loaded statically Unload a network protocol (breaking any connections that use it) Use this command net logon net logoff net password net net use net use net use net copy net move netrun net send net print net time load* net bind* unload*

101

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

To Enable a workstation to emulate a terminal Access resources across a gateway (TCP/IP to TCP/ IP) Print jobs on a shared printer using LaserTools PrintCache software Print jobs on a shared printer using the MS-DOS print command Print jobs on a shared printer without using a server to spool the jobs Flush the print spooler, releasing a print job that has no end-of-job signal Start NetWare using LAN Manager NetWare Connectivity Stop NetWare using LAN Manager NetWare Connectivity

Use this command kermit** addname* clipcach** clispool** printsta prtsc* nwload* nwunload**

*This is a utility. **These commands are only available when you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. Getting Information
To Get general Help Get Help for a specic command See an explanation of an error message See the time and date (on the server or domain) Learn what servers are available Learn what resources are shared on a server Use this command net help net help command net helpmsg net time net view net view

102

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

To Learn who is logged on a LAN Manager network Get information about a user on a LAN Manager network Learn about a shared printer queue Learn what settings are in effect for the Workstation service Get Help with message logging See which version of LAN Manager is running Learn what workstation connections are in effect Learn which services are currently running on the workstation Get a list of the workstations aliases

Use this command net who net who net print net cong workstation net log net version net use net start net name

Working with Services

To Start a service Pause a service Continue a service Stop a service Change settings for a service Use this command net start service net pause net continue net stop net cong workstation

Other
To Change a users permissions for a directory or le on a LAN Manager server Add or delete aliases on a workstation Use this command net access net name

103

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

To Control message logging Check physical network connections (TCP/IP)

Use this command net log ping**

*This is a utility. Using UNIX System Commands

To Change a users permissions for a directory or le Convert a UNIX System text le to MS-DOS List les or directories, and display UNIX System access permissions Rename or move a le using the UNIX operating system Run a command or program on a LAN Manager server Use this command uchmod* ud* udir* uren* netrun

*These commands are only available when you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network.

Getting Help from the Command Line

Several types of Help are available: To get a list of commands and topics for which Help is available
Type net help.

To display detailed information about a command

Type net help command.

To display a commands options

Type net help command /options.

To display a commands syntax

Type net command /?.

104

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

For more information about getting Help with commands, see Net Help, later in this chapter.

Getting Help with Error Messages

When an error occurs while you are using LAN Manager Enhanced, a message box appears that describes the error. To get Help with an error that is displayed while you are using the LAN Manager screen, press F1 while the message box is displayed. To get Help with an error from the command line, type net helpmsg and the number of the message you see in the message box. To get Help with an error message
Type net helpmsg message#, where message# is the number associated with the error message.

For more information about getting Help with an error, see Net Helpmsg, later in this chapter.

105

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Addname
Purpose The addname utility lets TCP/IP users access resources of a server on a different TCP/IP network, using a network gateway. Syntax addname computername ipaddress
addname computername /delete addname /load | /save [lename]

where computername
Is the name of the remote server whose entry you want to add or delete. Computernames can have as many as 8 characters (plus the .SERVE extension for LAN Manager for UNIX Systems servers). These computernames do not affect the assignment of any local computername or username.

ipaddress
Is the IP address that corresponds to computername. If the computername is stored in the LMHOSTS file, the new IP address temporarily replaces the existing IP address.

/delete
Deletes the specified computername from the workstations list of current entries but not from the LMHOSTS file.

/load
Loads a set of entries from the specified file. All current entries are deleted, and all entries in the specified file are added. If there is not enough room for all new entries in the file, an error is reported, and no changes are made to the list of current entries. If you dont specify a filename, the default LMHOSTS file is used.

/save
Stores the list of current entries in the specified file. All entries in the file are overwritten by the current entries. If you dont specify a filename, the default LMHOSTS file is used. To delete an entry from the default addname

106

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

configuration file, use addname /save after deleting the entry.

lename
Specifies the name of the file to load or save.

When you type addname with no options, the list of current addname entries is displayed. Comments When your computer is congured as a LAN Manager workstation using TCP/IP, you can use the addname utility to access the resources of a server on another TCP/IP network accessible through a network gateway. The addname utility matches remote servernames to their IP addresses. The addname utility temporarily adds entries to your workstations memory. These entries are deleted when you unload TCP/IP from memory or when you restart your computer. To save the entries in the LMHOSTS le, use the /save option. The addname utility can be used only when the TCP/IP software and the NetBIOS network software are loaded into your workstations memory. You can add as many as four entries using addname. Examples
To temporarily add the server FLAMINGO, whose IP address is 15.6.127.8, type: addname flamingo 15.6.127.8 To see the list of current entries, type: addname To save the list of current entries in the LMHOSTS file, type: addname /save To delete the server FLAMINGO from the LMHOSTS file, type: addname flamingo /delete To load new entries from the file A:\USER\MYHOSTS, type: addname /load a:\user\myhosts

107

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

This command deletes all existing entries before adding all entries from A:\USER\MYHOSTS. If there are more than 63 entries in A:\USER\MYHOSTS, an error occurs, and no changes are made to the list of current entries.

108

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Clipcach
Purpose The clipcach command enables an MS-DOS workstation to receive network print jobs from a server and to print these jobs on a shared printer physically connected to the workstation, using the LaserTools PrintCache software. This command is only available when you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. Syntax clipcach /i /s:driveid [any | \\servername] [ /d | /e] clipcach [any | \\servername] [/d | /e] where /i
Loads clipcach into memory. To load clipcach, use this option only after you boot the workstation.

/s:driveid
Specifies the drive ID that clipcach will use to link to its spool directory on the server. Replace driveid with the intended drive ID. To load clipcach, use this option only after you boot the workstation. Do not add the colon after the drive ID, for example, enter only N for driveid.

any
Allows clipcach to accept print requests from any server. Unless you specify otherwise, any is the default when you load clipcach.

servername
Represents the name of the server from which clipcach will accept print requests. Replace servername with the name of the intended server. The servername must contain a maximum of 8 characters plus the .serve extension.

/d
Temporarily disables clipcach. Network print jobs will be submitted to the queue, but will not print while clipcach is disabled. The printer can continue to be used locally, however.

109

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

/e
Re-enables clipcach. Network print jobs will now be printed.

Comments Clipcach is an MS-DOS terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) program that runs on the workstation to which a shared printer is connected. clipcach requires that the LaserTools PrintCache software be installed and loaded on the workstation to which the printer is connected. To receive print jobs from a server, clipcach automatically links to a shared spool directory on the server. Placing PrintCache in raw or cooked mode is accomplished by using command-line switches to the PrintCache print command. In raw mode, tabs are not expanded and ^Z is not interpreted as the end of the le. In most cases, raw mode is acceptable for printing text les. Graphics les will not print while PrintCache is in cooked mode. Cooked mode may be required occasionally to print text les containing tabs if neither the printer nor the application generating the print job expands tabs. See the LaserTools PrintCache manual for more information. Examples
To start the clipcach program automatically and use the N: drive, add the following line to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file: clipcach /i /s:N A shared printer is attached to your workstation and you want to use it locally. To do this you disable clipcach by typing: clipcach /d With clipcach disabled, you can use your printer locally. Network print jobs will be submitted to the queue on the server but will only be printed while clipcach is enabled. When you are done using the printer locally, and want it to be used over the network, you enable clipcach by typing: clipcach /e Network print jobs will now be printed. The shared printer attached to your workstation accepts print jobs from all the servers on your local area network. One of your coworkers needs to print out

110

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

several files as soon as possible. Your coworker will be sending these print requests from the server PRINT1.SERVE. To make sure that his or her files are printed in a timely manner, you allow the shared printer to accept requests from the PRINT1.SERVE server only by typing: clipcach \\print1.serve u Once the files have printed, you once again allow the shared printer to accept print requests from all of the servers on the local area network by typing: clipcach any

See Also
For information about See

Using clipcach Other print spoolers

Chapter 3, Using Shared Printers Clispool, Printsta

111

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Clispool
Purpose The clispool command enables an MS-DOS workstation to receive network print jobs from a server and to print these jobs on a shared printer physically connected to the workstation, using the MS-DOS print command. This command is only available when you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. Syntax clispool /i /s:driveid [any | \\servername] [/r | /c] [/d | /e] where /i
Loads clispool into memory. To load clispool, use this option only after you boot the workstation.

/s:driveid
Specifies the drive ID that clispool will use to link to its spool directory on the server. Replace driveid with the intended drive ID. To load clispool, use this option only after you boot the workstation. Do not add a colon after the drive ID; for example, enter only N for driveid.

any
Allows clispool to accept print requests from any server. Unless you specify otherwise, any is the default when you load clispool.

servername
Represents the name of the server from which clispool will accept print requests. Replace servername with the name of the intended server. The servername must contain a maximum of 8 characters plus the .SERVE extension.

/r
Places the MS-DOS print command into raw mode, which permits the printing of graphics files. In raw mode, tabs are not expanded and ^Z is not interpreted as the end of the file. In most cases, raw mode also is acceptable for printing text files, since tabs in text files are usually expanded by the printer or the application generating the print job. Unless you specify otherwise, raw mode is the default whenever you load clispool.

112

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

/c
Places the MS-DOS print command into cooked mode. In cooked mode, tabs are expanded, and ^Z is interpreted as the end of the file. Graphics files will not print while print is in cooked mode. Cooked mode may be required occasionally to print text files containing tabs if neither the printer nor the application generating the print job expands tabs.

/d
Temporarily disables clispool. Network print jobs will be submitted to the queue but will not print while clispool is disabled. The printer can continue to be used locally, however.

/e
Re-enables clispool. Network print jobs will now be printed.

Comments To access the clispool command, rst link to the appropriate shared directory. This command is stored in the DOSUTIL shared directory on a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server. To perform this command, you must rst link to this shared directory as in the following example:
net use d: \\server1.serve\dosutil

Clispool is an MS-DOS terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) program that runs on the workstation to which a shared printer is connected. Clispool requires that the MS-DOS print command be installed and loaded on the workstation to which the printer is connected. To receive print jobs from a server, clispool automatically links to a shared spool directory on the server. Examples
To start the clispool program automatically and use the N: drive, add the following line to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file: clispool /i /s:N u A shared printer is attached to your workstation and you want to use it locally. To do this you disable clispool by typing: clispool /d With clispool disabled, you can use your printer locally. Network print jobs will be submitted to the printers queue but will only be printed while clispool is

113

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

enabled. When you are done using the printer locally and want it to be used over the network, you enable clispool by typing: clispool /e Network print jobs will now be printed. The shared printer attached to your workstation accepts print jobs from all the servers on your local area network. One of your coworkers needs to print out several files as soon as possible. Your coworker will be sending these print requests from the server PRINT1.SERVE. To make sure that his files are printed in a timely manner, you allow the shared printer to accept requests from the PRINT1.SERVE server only by typing: clispool \\print1.serve u Once the files have printed, you once again allow the shared printer to accept print requests from all of the servers on the local area network by typing: clispool any

See Also
For information about See

Using clispool Other print spoolers

Chapter 3, Using Shared Printers Clipcach, Printsta

114

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Kermit
Purpose The kermit command enables an MS-DOS workstation to emulate a terminal in order to log on to a UNIX system host computer, upload and download les with a host that is also running Kermit, or exchange les with another workstation running the Kermit terminal emulator. This command is only available when you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. Syntax kermit [command, ... ] where command is any valid Kermit command. Comments To access the kermit command, rst link to the appropriate shared directory. This command is stored in the DOSUTIL shared directory on a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server. To perform this command, you must rst link to this shared directory as in the following example: net use d: \\server1.serve\dosutil The kermit command is a full-featured terminal emulator and le transfer utility. For more information on Kermit, see Appendix C, Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server. For a complete description of all the options and features, see your Kermit documentation. The functions provided by Kermit allow you to:
Create and use Kermit command scripts to automatically log on and transfer files. Redefine the keyboard so that any key can send any character or string while you communicate with a host computer. Define Kermit command macros. Start Kermit and execute Kermit commands from a batch file. Transfer files between two workstations running Kermit, and execute certain

115

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

MS-DOS commands remotely between the workstations. Use Kermit over the local area network or over a serial port. Change the type of terminal Kermit emulates, and set terminal attributes. Use your printer from Kermit. Customize the colors in the Kermit screen.

Source code for Kermit on many different computers and operating systems is available from Columbia University, which holds the copyright to the le transfer protocol and to many Kermit implementations.

116

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Load
Purpose The load utility loads the specied protocol on workstations using Demand Protocol Architecture (DPA). Syntax load protocol [/i] where protocol
Is the name of the protocol to be loaded. Information regarding protocols is placed in the PROTOCOL.INI file and in LANMAN\DRIVERS\PROTOCOL by the installation program. You should not edit these files yourself.

/i
Displays a list of protocols and the order in which they were bound.

Comments By default, the network (and protocol) are specied in the AUTOEXEC.BAT le. The load utility allows you to load protocols as you need them. Do not use the load utility while running the Microsoft Windows operating system. Either load the protocol before running the Windows operating system, or stop the Windows operating system, load the protocol, and then restart the Windows operating system. You may need to load a secondary protocol to access certain network resources. If you were using such a resource when you logged out, and the required protocol is not automatically loaded when you log on again, and you are using the persistent connections feature, you will receive a message that the resource is unavailable. You will be able to reconnect to the resource after you load the required protocol.

117

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

NOTE:

In order to use DPA to load protocols, the line dynamic = yes must be included in the [protman] section of the PROTOCOL.INI file. Also, in the CONFIG.SYS file, the line specifying the protocols to be used must come before the line that begins device = and contains \protman.dos.

See Also
For information about See

Other Demand Protocol Architecture utilities Installing and conguring protocols

unload Installation Guide for Clients

118

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net
Purpose The net command starts the LAN Manager screen. Syntax net [/mono] where /mono improves the quality of the LAN Manager screen on a workstation with a monochrome screen display. Use this option if you have difculty viewing the LAN Manager screen on your workstation. Comments After you type net, the LAN Manager screen appears. From this screen, you can use menus and dialog boxes to perform network tasks. To exit this screen, select the Exit button from the View menu. See Also
For information about See

The LAN Manager screen

Chapter 1, Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced

119

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Access
Purpose The net access command displays the permissions for using a shared directory or le on a LAN Manager server. It can also be used to change the permissions on LAN Manager servers. The net access command does not work with Windows NT servers. Note that you must have P permission for a resource to get information about it with net access. For more information, see your network administrator. Syntax
net access drive:path [/add name:permission[ ...] net access drive:path [/change name:permission[ ...] net access drive:path [/grant name:permission[ ...] net access drive:path [/revoke name:permission[ ...]

where drive
Is the devicename assigned to a shared directory containing the resource with permissions you want to change. This devicename must be assigned to a shared directory.

path
Is a resource with permissions you want to change.

name
Names one or more users or groups who are to change permissions.

permission
Is one to seven letters (R, W, C, X, D, A, P) representing the types of permissions you want to display or change. See below for the definitions of these letters.

/add
Creates a new set of permissions for a resource that has none assigned. To create more than one user or permission while assigning a new set of permissions, type several name:permission strings separated by spaces. Before you can grant or

120

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

revoke permissions for that resource, you must create a set of permissions for a resource. To control the resource, give yourself P permission.

/change
Changes one or more users permissions for a resource. To change more than one users permission, type several name:permission strings separated by spaces.

/grant
Assigns additional permissions to a resources existing set. To assign more than one permission, type several name:permission strings separated by spaces.

/revoke
Cancels one or more users permissions for a resource. To cancel permission for more than one user, type several name:permission strings separated by spaces.

Comments When your administrator assigns you a home directory (a directory on a server for your personal use) you can control this directory and the les on it so that only certain other users have access to them. You control access to your home directory by granting permissions after you connect to the server where your home directory resides. Permissions control a users access to a le or directory. Permissions and what they allow a user to do are as follows:
Permission R (read) W (write) C (create) X (execute) D (delete) A (attributes) Description Read and copy les, and view subdirectories. Make changes to les. Create les and subdirectories. Run a command or program. Remove les and subdirectories. Change MS-DOS le attributes. For information about le attributes, see your MS-DOS manual(s).

121

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Permission P (permissions)

Description Assign or alter permissions for a resource. Your administrator initially must give you this permission for a resource. Once you have it, you can use net access to assign permissions, including P permission, to other users or groups. When you create a new le or directory, be sure to assign yourself P permission. Otherwise you are denied further access to the le or directory you just created.

When you use net access, you must specify the devicename assigned to the shared directory and the path of a resource. When you specify a drive (or path) with net access, you get information about a resources current set of permissions, as shown in the following example:
Resource Permissions Permissions D:\MASTERDIR BILLRA:RWCXDAP *USERS:RWCDA *CORPOP:RWCDA

This lists the resource you specied and gives a two-column list of usernames and groupnames representing those who can use the resource. Groupnames are marked with an asterisk (*). Following each username and groupname is a list of the permissions assigned to the user or group. You must have P permission for a resource to get information about it with net access. If you create a new le or directory and want to assign permissions to it, rst use the /add option to specify which users and groups have access. Be sure to add yourself (with P permission), or you are denied subsequent access to the new le or directory. Use the /grant and /revoke options to add and cancel permissions for users and groups. Use the /change option to change existing permissions for a resource. If you create a le in a directory with permissions, the new le inherits the directorys permissions. Use the net access command only if you want to change the les permissions.

122

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Examples
To view the permissions for the shared directory that connects to the G: devicename, type: net access g: To add the user jamesro with read and write permissions to the users on the shared directory that connects to the G: devicename, type: net access g: /grant jamesro:rw

See Also
For information about See

Connecting to shared resources

Net Use

123

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Config Workstation

Purpose The net cong workstation command displays the current settings for a workstation. Syntax net cong workstation Comments The net cong workstation command displays settings for a workstation, such as the logon domain and the username. Example
To display the current settings for a workstation, type: net config workstation

See Also
For information about See

Controlling and adjusting services Changing workstation settings when starting the Workstation service

Chapter 1, Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Net Start Workstation

124

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Continue
Purpose The net continue command reactivates services or network connections suspended with the net pause command. Syntax net continue {workstation | messenger | netpopup | drdr | prdr} where workstation
Continues all workstation connections, including the Messenger and Netpopup services.

messenger
Continues the Messenger service.

netpopup
Continues the Netpopup service. Type minipop instead if your workstation is configured to display messages only when the Windows operating system is running.

drdr
Continues all workstation connections to shared directories.

prdr
Continues all workstation connections to shared printer queues.

Comments You can abbreviate the net continue command as net cont. See Also
For information about See

Pausing and continuing a service or connections using the LAN Manager screen

Chapter 1, Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced

125

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

For information about

See

Pausing a service or network connections

Net Pause

126

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Copy
Purpose The net copy command copies les across the network from a source to a destination. Syntax net copy source[+source[+...]] [/a | /b] [destination [/a | /b] [/v]] where source
Specifies one or more files, directories, or devicenames to copy. You can specify multiple files by separating filenames with a plus sign (+) or by using MS-DOS wildcard characters.

destination
Specifies to which file, directory, or devicename source copies.

/a
Treats the source or destination as ASCII text.

/b
Treats the source or destination as a binary file.

/v
Verifies that information is properly recorded on the destination disk.

Comments The net copy command is similar to the MS-DOS copy command, but it is much faster for copying between directories on a server. You dont have to connect to shared directories to use the net copy command. LAN Manager Enhanced makes the connections for you during a copy. You usually use the net copy command to copy les, but source can also be a directory (to copy all les in the directory), a devicename (such as A:, to copy all les in the current directory of drive A), or the MS-DOS con command (to copy what you type at the keyboard). Destination can be a devicename (such as LPT1:, to copy to the device connected to LPT1) or it can be a network path.
127

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

When source is a lename, the le is assumed to be in the current directory on the current drive. When destination is an existing le, the le is overwritten. If destination is a le that does not already exist, a new le is created. The new le is given the same name, creation date, and creation time as the source le. When you specify only a drive as the destination, LAN Manager Enhanced copies to the current directory on that drive. When you specify no drive, the source copies to the current drive and directory. The net copy command creates temporary connections between your workstation and directories shared by other network users as part of the copying process. When you have many connections to shared directories and no remaining drive letters to assign to the temporary connection that net copy needs to create, the net copy command fails. To correct this problem, temporarily end one of your connections before using net copy. You cannot use the net copy command if you have used any of the switches while setting the MS-DOS environmental variable comspec. You can set the variable with a command such as set comspec=c:\dos\command.com However, if you specify any options such as /p or /c, you will be unable to use the net copy command. Using the /a or /b Option The /a and /b options perform differently depending on whether they follow source or destination. The /a option is in effect in both cases unless the /b option is specied. With the /a option the le is treated as ASCII text:
When you place /a after source, the copy stops before the first end-of-file character (an invisible character that signifies the end of a file). When you place /a after destination, an end-of-file character is added as the last character of the new file.

With the /b option the le is copied in binary format:

When you place /b after source, all end-of-file characters are copied. When you place /b after destination, all but the last end-of-file character are

128

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

copied.

Using the /v Option The /v option veries that copied les are properly recorded. This process slows down the process of the net copy command. Examples
To copy the MAIL.DOC file from the LISTS directory on the \\SALES server to the ADDRESS directory on the \\SALES server, type: net copy \\sales\lists\mail.doc \\sales\address To copy all files from the root directory of the G: network drive ID to the root directory of the U: network drive ID, type: net copy g: \*.* u:\

See Also
For information about See

Moving les MS-DOS copy command

Net Move MS-DOS manual(s)

129

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Help
Purpose The net help command displays a list of commands, utilities, and topics for which you can get Help. It also provides Help with a specic command or topic. Syntax net help [command [/options] | topic] net command {/help | /?} where command
Is the command you need help with. (Dont type net as part of command.)

topic
Is the topic you need help with.

/options
Describes the options of the command you need help with.

/help
Displays the Help text for the command you need help with.

/?
Displays the syntax for the command you need help with.

To view a list of all the commands and topics for which Help is available, type net help without options. Examples
To view a list of all the commands and topics for which Help is available, type: net help To view information about the net print command, type: net help print - Or

130

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

net print /help To view the syntax for the net print command, type: net print /? To view the options available for the net continue command, type: net help continue /options

See Also
For information about See

Getting Help while using the LAN Manager screen Getting Help with error messages

Chapter 1, Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Net Helpmsg

131

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Helpmsg
Purpose The net helpmsg command provides Help with a LAN Manager Enhanced error message. Syntax net helpmsg message# where message# is the four-digit number of the LAN Manager Enhanced message that you need help with. Comments When a network operation fails, you see a message similar to the following:
NET2182: The requested service has already been started.

LAN Manager Enhanced precedes error-message numbers with NET, but you only have to type the number itself for message#. The net helpmsg command explains why an error occurred and tells you how to solve the problem. Example
To get Help with LAN Manager Enhanced error message NET2182, type: net helpmsg 2182

The error message and Help information appear. See Also

Getting Help while using the LAN Manager screen Getting Help with LAN Manager Enhanced commands Chapter 1, Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Net Help

132

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Log
Purpose The net log command displays or controls information about message logging. Syntax net log [drive:path] lename | devicename] [/on | /off] where drive:path
Tells where the message log file is stored. Without a drive letter and path, LAN Manager Enhanced assumes the file is stored in the LANMAN.DOS\LOGS directory.

lename
Is the name of the message log file. When filename has a .LOG extension, type only the name, without .LOG. By default, messages are saved in the MESSAGES.LOG file.

devicename
Is the name of a device at your workstation that connects to a printer queue. Devicename can be an LPT devicename (to print messages as theyre received) or NUL: (to have no log file at all). If messages are printed, they are not saved in the MESSAGES.LOG file.

/on
Starts message logging.

/off
Stops message logging.

To display information about message logging, type net log without options. Comments Message logging is on by default when the Messenger service starts.

133

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

The net log command controls the way messages are saved. You can stop and start message logging, change the name of the le that stores the messages, and print messages as theyre received. You can read the message log le with the MS-DOS type command. Use the MS-DOS more command to read the log le one screen at a time. You can stop message logging with the /off option and still view messages when the Netpopup service is running. When the Netpopup service is stopped and message logging is off, your workstation emits a beep when it receives a message but neither displays nor logs the message. Instead of storing your messages in a message log, you can print your messages as soon as they arrive. Note that you cannot print and then store messages. Messages that are printed are not stored in the message log. Examples
To see if message logging is on and what the message log filename is, type: net log To change the name of the message log file from MESSAGES.LOG to NOVEMBER.LOG, type: net log november To print messages directly to the printer attached to LPT1:, type: net log lpt1:

See Also
For information about See

Logging messages Starting the Messenger service

Chapter 4, Sending and Receiving Messages Net Start Messenger

134

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Logoff
Purpose The net logoff command logs a user off from the network. Syntax net logoff Comments The net logoff command removes the username and password associated with a workstation from the network. Logging off does not stop the Workstation service. It simply ensures that no unauthorized person can use a username and password to gain access to shared resources. Logging off cancels all of a workstations connections. You cannot log off if you are using a shared directory. If you are using a shared directory, you must change to a local drive on your workstation before using net logoff. See Also
For information about See

Starting LAN Manager Enhanced Logging on

Chapter 1, Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Net Logon

135

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Logon
Purpose The net logon command logs a user on to the network and establishes the username, password, and domain for a workstation. Syntax net logon [username [password | *]] [/domain:name] [/y] where username
Is the name by which you identify yourself on the network. A username can have as many as 20 characters.

password
Is the password for your user account.

*
Produces a password prompt. A password does not appear when you type it at a password prompt.

/domain:name
Logs you on in a domain other than your workstation domain. This domain is called the logon domain.

/y
Answers any prompts that require a yes or no answer with a yes. You must include your username when using the /y option. You can use * for the password when using the /y option.

To be prompted for your username and password, type net logon without options. Comments The net logon command uses your username and password to establish a session on the network for your workstation, and grants you access to shared resources. If you are accessing a network with Windows NT Advanced Servers or LAN Manager servers, the username and password

136

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

also log you on in a domain. Logging on also restores connections that existed at a workstation when the last user logged off, if the persistent connections feature is in use. Only one user can log on at a workstation at a time. You can use net logon to log on with a different username or to log on in a different domain to a network that supports domains, but you must rst log off. If you try to use net logon when someone is already logged on at the workstation, a prompt will ask whether you want to log off. You do not need to issue a separate net logoff command.
NOTE: To view resources on the server, the Windows NT computer or the LAN Manager server running the Netlogon service and the MS-DOS workstation must both run the same protocol (for example, NetBEUI). In addition, to log on, this protocol must be the workstations designated first protocol.

About Usernames If you dont specify a username with net logon, LAN Manager Enhanced suggests a username. This username comes from the username entry in the LANMAN.INI le. If the entry is blank, the computername is suggested. About Passwords A password is a condential word that, together with your username, establishes your identity and gives you access to resources. When you log on to the network or connect to a shared resource, your workstation sends the username and password you specify with net logon to a server for verication. The server checks to see whether it has an account for you and whether the logon password you specied matches the password in your account. LAN Manager Enhanced uses accounts in two ways. Individual servers use accounts to limit access to their resources. In a domain, a server maintains an account for each user. On Windows NT Advanced Servers, you can also use all resources of Windows NT Advanced Server domains that trust the domain you are logged on to. Once you log on, you can use all the resources in the domain to which your account is granted access.

137

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Repeated attempts to log on when you dont remember your password are not recommended. If, after several tries, you have not supplied the correct password, you may be locked out of the account. Locking out protects your account from anyone who may try to guess your password. Your network administrator can remove the lock by re-enabling your account. If your password is within three weeks of expiring, and your logon requests are handled by a LAN Manager server, LAN Manager warns you to change it. If the password has already expired, you must change the password in order to log on. See the net password command. About Domains A domain is a group of workstations on a Windows NT Advanced Server or LAN Manager networks set up by an administrator. When you dont specify a /domain:name, LAN Manager Enhanced logs you on in your workstation domain, which is designated by the domain entry in the LANMAN.INI le. Your workstation domain probably includes the workstations and servers you most often work with. When you specify a /domain:name, you are logged on in a domain other than your workstation domain. This domain is called the logon domain. Use the net view command to display servers visible in your workstation domain, the logon domain, and the domains listed in the othdomains entry in the LANMAN.INI le. When you log on in a domain, you get access to most of the shared resources in the domain. Computers running Workgroup Connections may be grouped into workgroups, which function much like LAN Manager or Windows NT Advanced Server domains. When you log on there may be a delay while the workstation broadcasts your logon request and waits for a domain controller (a server that validates logon requests) to respond. If no domain controller is available, this delay can last more than 12 seconds. To avoid the delay, you can specify the /domain:standalone option. Examples
To log on in your workstation domain, type: net logon

138

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

LAN Manager Enhanced asks you for a username and then asks for a password. To log on with the username felix and be prompted for a password, type: net logon felix * You see the following display: Type your password: Your password does not appear when you type it. To log on in the accounting domain with the username felix and the password freddy, type: net logon felix freddy /domain:accounting

See Also
For information about See

Logging on and off Logging off Changing your password

Chapter 1, Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Net Logoff Net Password

139

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Move
Purpose The net move command moves les across the network from a source to a destination. Syntax net move source [destination] where source
Is the path of one or more files to move. Specify multiple filenames with MS-DOS wildcard characters.

destination
Is the path to which source moves. When you are moving more than one file, destination must be a directory. When you omit destination, files move to the current directory. LAN Manager Enhanced wont overwrite an existing file during a move. If destination is an existing file, the move is canceled.

Comments Use this command to move les between any two directories you have access to on the network. Moving a le is different from copying a le. Moving relocates the le; copying makes a duplicate. The moved le is given the date and time that the move occurred. You can move les between two remote computers. For instance, while working at workstation A, you can move les between servers B and C. You dont have to connect to shared directories to use net move. LAN Manager Enhanced makes the connections for you.
NOTE: When moving files from one shared directory to the root of another shared directory, specify the backslash (\) in the destination. For example: net move e:\text\*.* f:\.

Example
To move all the files in the TEXT directory on drive C to the BUDGET

140

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

subdirectory in the \\ADMIN servers REPORTS shared directory, type: net move c:\text\*.* \\admin\reports\budget

See Also
For information about See

Copying les

Net Copy

141

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Name
Purpose The net name command adds or deletes a message alias and displays a workstations list of aliases. Syntax net name alias [/add | /delete] where alias
Is the alias you want to add or delete. An alias is a name to which you can send messages.

/add
Adds an alias to a workstation. Typing /add is optional; typing net name alias performs the same task.

/delete
Removes an alias from a workstation.

To display a list of aliases in use at a workstation, type net name without options. Comments A workstation can have three kinds of aliases, each receiving messages:
The workstations computername, which is added when the Workstation service startsu Your username, which is added when you log on, provided you are not logged on elsewhere on the networku Aliases added with the net name command or through the Aliases option from the Message menu of the LAN Manager screen

Receiving Messages A workstation can only receive messages when the Messenger service is running. When the Netpopup service is also running, a message box displays messages on your screen. When message logging is on, the message is sent

142

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

to the message log. When the Netpopup service and message logging are both off, you only hear a beep when your workstation receives a message. In this case, the message is neither saved nor logged in the message log. A workstation receives messages sent to any of its aliases. A user does not have to be logged on to the workstation for the aliases at the workstation to receive messages. Adding and Deleting an Alias You cant add an alias to your workstation if that alias is already in use on the network. Similarly, you cant start the Workstation service with a computername that is in use as an alias at another workstation. You can log on with a username that is in use elsewhere as an alias, but the username isnt added as an alias to your workstation, and you dont receive messages for that username at your workstation. Use the /delete option to remove an alias. You can delete any alias in use at your workstation except the computername. Logging off deletes your username alias. Other aliases on your workstation, including the computername, still receive messages as long as the Workstation service is running.
NOTE: Before you can add new aliases, your administrator may need to make changes to the nummsgnames keyword in the [messenger] section of the LANMAN.INI file.

Examples
To view the list of aliases on your workstation, type: net name To add the alias juliewo to your workstation, type: net name juliewo To remove the alias juliewo from your workstation, type: net name juliewo /delete

143

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

See Also
For information about See

Messages Saving your messages in a le Sending messages

Chapter 4, Sending and Receiving Messages Net Log Net Send

144

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Password
Purpose The net password command changes the password for a user account on a server or in a domain. Syntax net password [\\computername | /domain:name] username oldpass [newpass | *] ] where computername
Is the server with the user account for which the password will change.

/domain:name
Specifies a domain other than the workstation domain in which the password will change.

username
Is your username.

oldpass
Is your current password.

newpass
Is the new password. The new password can have as many as 14 characters.

To be prompted for entries, type net password without options. Comments User accounts are set up to control a users access to shared resources on a server or in a domain. An account includes the username and the password for a user. Accounts perform similar functions on servers and in domains. The difference is that an account in a domain controls access to most of the shared resources on the servers in the domain, rather than just one servers resources.

145

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

If you dont supply a computername or a /domain:name, LAN Manager Enhanced assumes you are changing the password for your account in the workstation domain. On LAN Manager servers, accounts may be set up so that the password expires after a certain length of time, and there may be a limit on how often a given password may be reused. When a password expiration date is approaching or has passed, the LAN Manager server sends a warning message during logon. If a new password is specied that is disallowed because it has been used too recently, a message appears requesting that a different password be used. Keeping Passwords Condential Keep your password condential by typing an asterisk (*) instead of your password. You are then prompted for your password, which does not appear as you type it at the prompt. When you are changing your password, LAN Manager Enhanced asks for the new password twice to ensure that it is correct. If you forget your password, see your administrator for a new one. You can then use net password to change the new password to one that you want. If, after several tries to log on, LAN Manager has not received the correct password, you may be locked out of the account. This protects your account from anyone who may try to guess your password. Your network administrator can remove the lock by re-enabling your account. Examples
To change your password on the \\PRODUCT server from petunia to daffodil (your username is robertch), type: net password \\product robertch petunia daffodil To make the same change, but have LAN Manager Enhanced prompt you for a new password that wont appear when you type it, type: net password \\product robertch petunia * To change your password in your workstation domain from carnation to orchid, type: net password robertch carnation orchid

146

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

To change your password in the accounting domain from magnolia to orchid, type: net password /domain:accounting robertch magnolia orchid

See Also
For information about See

Passwords Logging on with a password

Chapter 1, Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Net Logon

147

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Pause
Purpose The net pause command pauses services or workstation connections to shared resources. Syntax net pause {workstation | messenger | netpopup | drdr | prdr} where workstation
Pauses all workstation connections.

messenger
Pauses the Messenger service.

netpopup
Pauses the Netpopup service. Type minipop instead if your workstation is configured to display messages only when the Windows operating system is running.

drdr
Pauses all workstation connections to shared directories.

prdr
Pauses all workstation connections to shared printer queues.

Comments Pausing your workstation and its connections places them on hold while keeping your username and password active. Reactivate your workstation with the net continue command. Pausing connections allows you to use a devicename for a device at your workstation instead of for a shared resource. For example, the LPT1: devicename can belong to a shared printer queue for a laser printer. If you also use LPT1: as the devicename for a dot-matrix printer at your workstation, you can pause the network connection and print a quick draft at your desk. To send print jobs back to the shared printer queue, reactivate the connection with the net continue command.
148

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

See Also
For information about See

Continuing a paused service or connection Stopping the Workstation service

Net Continue Net Stop

149

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Print
Purpose The net print command displays information about a shared printer queue or controls a users print jobs. Syntax net print {\\computername[\sharename] | devicename} net print {\\computername | devicename} [job# {/hold | /release | /delete}] where computername
Is the name of a server sharing the printer queue(s) you want information about.

\sharename
Is the name of a printer queue you want information about.

devicename
Is the name of a device at your workstation that connects to the printer queue you want information about.

job#
Is an identification number assigned to a queued print job you want to control. Job numbers are unique on a server.

/hold
Suspends a print job. A suspended print job does not print until the /release option reactivates it.

/release
Reactivates a print job that is on hold.

/delete
Cancels a print job.

Comments The net print command shows you where in a printer queue a print job is. With this command, you can also hold, release, or delete a print job.
150

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Sending a job to a printer queue usually requires connecting to the queue with the net use command, and then submitting the print job through an application. You can also send a job to a queue with net copy or the MS-DOS copy command. When you specify a computername (for example, \\SALES) with net print, you get information about the shared printer queues on the server with the computername you specify. You dont have to make a connection to a queue to get information about it. The display is similar to the following.
Printer Queues at \\SALES Name Job # Size Status LASER Queue 3 jobs *Queue Active* JACKST 1 2509 Printing on LPT1 JENNYT 3 75 Waiting JENNYT 4 75 Waiting PRT Queue 2 jobs *Queue Active* BENST 5 180 Printing on LPT2 JOHNOC 6 512 Waiting

The columns in this display give the following information: Name

The sharename of each printer queue on the server you specified. Listed beneath the sharename are the usernames of people whose print jobs are printing or waiting to print.

Job #
The number of print jobs in each printer queue. Listed beneath the number of jobs is the unique identification number of each job in the queue.

Size
The size of each print job in bytes.

Status
The status of either the printer queue or a print job.

151

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

An administrator controls the status of a printer queue. A printer queues status can be:
Status Active Held Held until Pending delete Error Description Available to receive print jobs Suspended Suspended until the time displayed Being shut down Unavailable because of malfunction

The status of a print job can be:

Status Printing on devicename Spooling Waiting Held Held on devicename Paused Out of paper on devicename Error on devicename Ofine on devicename Description Printing on the printer attached to the servers devicename Transferring into the printer queue Waiting for a printer to become available Held by a user with the /hold option Held because an administrator put the queue on hold Paused by a user or an administrator Stopped because the printer is out of paper Stopped because of a malfunction Stopped because the printer is ofine

Examples
To see the printer queues shared on the \\PRODUCT server, type: net print \\product To learn about the DOTM queue on the \\PRODUCT server, type:

152

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

net print \\product\dotm If your workstations LPT1 devicename attaches to the \\PRODUCT servers LASER queue, display the contents of the queue by typing net print lpt1: - Or net print \\product\laser To cancel a print job with the job identification number 7 on the \\PRODUCT server that attaches to your workstations LPT1 devicename, type: net print \\product 7 /delete - Or net print lpt1: 7 /delete

See Also
For information about See

Shared printers Connecting to a printer queue Viewing servers and queues Sending an end-of-job signal to a printer

Chapter 3, Using Shared Printers Net Use Net View Chapter 3, Using Shared Printers, and Prtsc

153

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Send
Purpose The net send command sends a message or short le to one or more users on a network. Syntax net send {alias | * | /domain[:name] | /broadcast} message where alias
Is the username, computername, or other name you want to send a message to. When the alias is a computername that contains blank characters, enclose the alias in quotation marks (" ").

*
Sends a message to all the aliases in your workstation domain.

/domain:name
If you specify name, the message is sent to all the aliases in the specified domain.

/broadcast
Sends a message to all the aliases on the network.

message
Is the text of a message or the complete path of a text file (preceded by <) you want to send.

Comments Use the net send command to send a message to a single user, to users in a domain, or to all users on the network. An alias must be logged on, or active on the network to receive a message, and the Messenger service must be running on the receiving workstation. If several local area network adapters are used, the workstation can exchange messages only through the rst adapter. The size of a message that a workstation can receive is limited to 128 characters.

154

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

The simplest way to send a message is to type it from the MS-DOS prompt. You can type a longer message (over several lines) by pressing ENTER after net send alias and after each line of text. To send the message, press CTRL+Z or F6, and then press ENTER. LAN Manager Enhanced provides several ways to broadcast a message, meaning send a message to many users on the network. You can broadcast messages to all the aliases in your workstation domain (use * or /domain), a different domain (use /domain:name), or the entire network (use / broadcast). Broadcast messages must be 128 characters or fewer. Use this feature with discretion. To send a message that includes a slash mark (/), you must enclose the entire message in quotation marks (" "). Otherwise, LAN Manager assumes the slash mark represents the beginning of a command option. The message is not sent, and you receive the following error message:
NET3506: The option / is unknown.

Examples
To send the message Meeting changed to 3 p.m. Same place. to the alias jackst, type: net send jackst Meeting changed to 3 p.m. Same place. Another way to type this message is net send jackst Meeting changed to 3 p.m. Same place. Press ENTER after each line. To send this message, press CTRL+Z or F6, and then press ENTER. To send the small text file INVITE.DOC to all the aliases in the legal domain, type: net send /domain:legal <invite.doc To inform everyone in your workstation domain that a party is being held in the cafeteria, type: net send * There's a party in the cafeteria!

155

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

To send a message that includes a slash mark, type: net send marcia "Format your disk with FORMAT /4"

To send a message to the user at the SALES 2 workstation, type: net send "sales 2" Meeting in 10 minutes.

See Also
For information about See

Messages Saving or printing messages Adding aliases Using the Messenger service

Chapter 4, Sending and Receiving Messages Net Log Net Name Net Start Messenger

156

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Start Encrypt

Purpose The net start encrypt command causes passwords from MS-DOS workstations to be encoded before they are transmitted across the network. Syntax net start encrypt Comments The Encrypt service encrypts passwords before sending them across the network. No special setup is required for servers to decode the passwords. Password encryption is embedded in Windows NT and OS/2. MS-DOS workstations send passwords without encryption unless this service is used. By default, the LAN Manager Installer installs the Encrypt service on MS-DOS workstations. The Encrypt service can be stopped only by stopping the Workstation service.

157

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Start Messenger

Purpose The net start messenger command starts the Messenger service. Syntax net start messenger [options] where options are as follows: /logle:path | device
Assigns a path for the message log file. You can also specify a device, such as LPT1: (to print messages as they arrive) or NUL: (to have no log file at all). The default path for the message log file is LANMAN.DOS\LOGS \MESSAGES.LOG.

/nummsgnames:number
Sets the allowable number of message aliases for a workstation. The range is from 1 to 10 aliases; the default is 2.

/sizmessbuf:bytes
Sets the size, in bytes, of the message buffer, limiting the size of messages a workstation can receive. The range is from 128 through 8192 bytes; the default is 256.

To display a list of services that are running at a workstation, type net start without options. Comments The Messenger service must be started for a workstation to receive messages. By default, LAN Manager Enhanced is congured to start the Messenger service when the Workstation service is started. Do not run the Messenger service on workstations running Norton Commander 3.0. If messages are received at such a workstation, the computer will halt or reboot itself.

158

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

You send a message to a workstations alias with the net send command. LAN Manager Enhanced uses three types of aliases: computernames, usernames, and aliases added with the net name command or through the Aliases option from the Message menu of the LAN Manager screen. There are two ways a workstation can receive messages sent to its aliases:
When the Netpopup and Messenger services are running, a message box displays each message on the workstations screen. When message logging is on, the incoming message is sent to a message log file or a printer. The net log command controls message logging.

Changes made with the net start messenger command remain in effect only as long as the Messenger service is running. Once started, the Messenger service can be stopped only by stopping the Workstation service. Example
To start the Messenger service with a message buffer of 5120 bytes, type: net start messenger /sizmessbuf:5120

See Also
For information about See

Messages Logging messages Adding aliases Sending messages Starting the Netpopup service Starting the Workstation service

Chapter 4, Sending and Receiving Messages Net Log Net Name Net Send Net Start Netpopup Net Start Workstation

159

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Start Netpopup

Purpose The net start netpopup command starts the Netpopup service. Syntax net start netpopup To display a list of services that are running at a workstation, type net start without options. If your workstation is congured to display messages only when the Windows operating system is running, type net start minipop. Comments With the Netpopup service, you can see messages as they arrive at your workstation. The Messenger service must be running for your workstation to receive messages. By default, the Messenger service and the Netpopup (or Minipop) service(s) are congured to start when the Workstation service is started. Once started, the Netpopup service can be stopped only by stopping the Workstation service. A message box appears. A message box disappears after one minute or when you press ESC. If message logging is on, a message is saved in the message log le. If message logging is off, messages are discarded after they are displayed. See Also
For information about See

Messages Controlling network services Logging messages Starting the Messenger service
160

Chapter 4, Sending and Receiving Messages Net Continue, Net Pause, Net Stop Net Log Net Start Messenger

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Start Workstation

Purpose The net start workstation command starts the Workstation service. Syntax net start workstation [options] where options are as follows: /computername:name
Is a unique name that identifies a workstation on the network. If the computername matches any of the following on the network, the Workstation service does not start: A computername on another workstation. A username on another workstation. A domain name on the network. An alias on the workstation or another workstation.

Computernames can have from 1 through 15 characters, including letters, numbers, and the following symbols: ! # $ % & ' ( ) - . @ ^ _ { } ~

/domain:name
Is the name of a workstation domain. A domain name can have from 1 through 15 characters.

/othdomains:name[,...]
Specifies one or more domains that a workstation belongs to, in addition to the workstation domain. You can specify as many as four domains for a workstation. When you type this option, separate multiple domain names with commas.

/umb:{yes | no}
Determines whether to use upper memory blocks (UMBs) as available (for MS-DOS computers). This overrides any umb setting for this service in the LANMAN.INI file. If /umb is not specified, all available UMBs will be used.

161

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

/wrkservices:service[,...]
Lists the LAN Manager Enhanced services you want to start automatically when the Workstation service starts. When you type this option, separate multiple service names with commas. You cannot abbreviate service names.

To display a list of services that are running at a workstation, type net start without options. Comments You can abbreviate workstation as wksta, work, redirector, redir, or rdr. You must start the Workstation service to use LAN Manager Enhanced. The net start workstation command has additional options that are not listed here. For a description of all these options and their values, see the discussion of the [workstation] section of the LANMAN.INI le in the Installation Guide for Clients. When assigning a computername to start the Workstation service, typing / computername:name is optional; you can also type net start workstation computername. Example
To start a workstation with the computername \\FINANCE and the logon domain legal, type: net start workstation finance /domain:legal

See Also
For information about See

Starting LAN Manager Pausing the Workstation service Stopping the Workstation service

Chapter 1, Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Net Pause Net Stop

162

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Stop Workstation

Purpose The net stop workstation command stops the Workstation service. Syntax net stop workstation Comments Stopping the Workstation service cancels all network connections the Workstation service is using and logs you off from the network. It also stops all other services that are running. Stopping the Workstation service differs from pausing the Workstation service. Pausing puts the service on hold and suspends any network connections. If any protocols were loaded with Demand Protocol Architecture (DPA), they are unloaded before stopping the Workstation service. Stopping the Workstation service does not remove software from your workstations memory. LAN Manager Enhanced is a terminate-and-stayresident (TSR) program, which means that, when the program stops, it stays in a computers memory. If other TSR programs are loaded into the computers memory, the net stop workstation command may not work. See Also
For information about See

LAN Manager Enhanced services Starting services Demand Protocol Architecture (DPA)

Chapter 1, Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Net Start Messenger, Net Start Netpopup, Net Start Workstation Load, Unload

163

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Time
Purpose The net time command synchronizes a workstations clock with a servers, or displays the time and date for a server or domain. Syntax net time [\\computername | /domain[:name]] [/set] where \\computername
Is the name of a server with which you want to check or synchronize a workstations clock.

/domain[:name]
Specifies that the domain controller is used as the time source. Use name to specify a domain other than the workstation domain.

/set
Synchronizes a workstations clock with that of a specified server or domain.

To display the current time and date for the server designated as the networks ofcial time source, type net time without options. Comments This command provides a way to check whether a workstations clock is properly synchronized with the clocks on its servers. Examples
To see the time and date for the domain controller for the accounting domain, type: net time /domain:accounting To set your workstations clock to the time and date on the networks designated time server, type: net time /set

164

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Use
Purpose The net use command connects a workstation to or disconnects a workstation from a shared resource, or displays information about workstation connections. It also controls the persistent net connections feature. Syntax net use [devicename] [\\computername\sharename [password | *]] net use {devicename | \\computername\sharename} /delete net use [devicename] [\\computername\sharename [password | *]] /home net use /persistent:{yes | no | freeze | save} where devicename
Assigns a name to a device connected to a shared resource or specifies the disconnecting devicename. LAN Manager Enhanced uses two kinds of devicenames, one type for disk drives (all nonlocal drive letters through the value of lastdrive as defined in the CONFIG.SYS file) and the other type for printers (LPT1: through LPT3:).

computername
Is the name of a server sharing a resource. If the computername contains blank characters, enclose the double backslash (\\) and the computername in quotation marks (" ").

sharename
Is the name of a resource.

password
Is the password needed to use a resource. To be prompted for the password, type an asterisk (*) instead of the password. A password does not appear when you type it at a password prompt.

/delete
Cancels a network connection.

165

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

/home
Specifies that the directory is used as a home directory.

/p[ersistent]
Controls the use of persistent network connections. This switch is used alone; it cannot be combined with any other switch, nor can it be used while adding or removing a connection. The default is yes.

yes
Saves all connections as they are made and restores them at next logon.

no
Neither saves nor restores connections at the next logon.

freeze
Stops saving connections but does not overwrite the existing list of connections.

save
Saves your current connections, over writing any previously saved connections. These settings will be restored each time you log on. Connections made after using the net use /o: save command are neither save nor restored.

To list a workstations connections, type net use without options. Comments By connecting a workstation to a shared resource, you can use the resource as if it were attached to the workstation. For example, net use can connect your workstation to a shared printer queue that uses a high-quality printer. When you use a program such as Microsoft Excel, you can print les on that printer by directing print jobs to the devicename for the queue that uses the printer. You can use a shared resource without making a connection with net use. The connection is made automatically by MS-DOS and some network programs when you specify the network path of the resource on the command line. If the resource is protected by a password, you must establish access with net use. You dont have to assign a devicename to establish access. Just type net use, the network path of the resource, and the password.
166

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

You can use a shared directory without assigning a devicename to the connection. You do this at the MS-DOS prompt by using the network path with certain commands and applications. For example, to use Microsoft Word to edit the LIST.DOC le in the shared directory with the network path \\SALES\FARWEST, type:
word \\sales\farwest\list.doc

Microsoft Word loads the shared le even though you havent made a previous connection to \\SALES\FARWEST. Note that this procedure doesnt work when you need a password to gain access to \\SALES\FARWEST. In this case, you must rst establish access to the directory. You cannot delete a connection to a shared directory while that directory is your current drive. You must change to another drive before you delete the connection.
NOTE: You can only make connections to sharenames of up to eight characters, optionally followed by an extension consisting of a period (.) and one to three characters. LAN Manager Enhanced sends an error message if you try to connect to a longer sharename.

Viewing Your Workstations Connections When you type net use without options, you get information about your workstations connections in a display similar to the following:
Status Local name Remote name OK M: \\FINANCE\SCRATCH DISCONNECTED G: \\PRODUCT\C ERROR LPT1: \\PRINT1\LASER

The status of a connection can be:

Status OK Disconnected Paused Description Active Suspended by the server but will reestablish when you use it Paused by the workstation

167

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Error

Ended and must be deleted

The Local name is the devicename assigned to the resource; Remote name is its network path. There are two ways to get information about a connection:
Type net use devicename. Type net use and the network path of the resource. You must type this command twice: first to establish a connection to the resource, and then to get information about it.

Either method produces a display similar to the following:

Local name Remote name Resource type Status #Opens #Connections LPT1: \\PRINT1\LASER Print OK 0 1

Resource type
Is the type of resource you are using (disk or printer).

#Opens
Is the number of files currently open in this connection.

#Connections
Is the number of connections the workstation has to the resource.

Examples
To assign the devicename E to the LETTERS directory on the \\FINANCE server, type: net use e: \\finance\letters To assign the devicename LPT1 to the LASER2 printer queue on the \\ACCOUNT server, type: net use lpt1: \\account\laser2 To cancel your connection to the \\ACCOUNT\LASER2 printer queue connected to LPT1, type:

168

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

net use lpt1: /delete To establish access to the \\FINANCE servers SCRATCH shared directory, which requires the password meteor, type: net use \\finance\scratch meteor To cancel your connection to the \\FINANCE\SCRATCH shared directory, type: net use \\finance\scratch /delete

You must use quotation marks with a servername that has a space. If you omit the quotation marks, LAN Manager will not accept a servername that includes a space. See Also
For information about See

Making connections Pausing and continuing connections Viewing connections

Chapter 1, Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Net Pause, Net Continue Net View

169

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Version
Purpose The net version command informs you of the version of LAN Manager running on the computer at which the command is typed. Syntax net version Comments This command helps you determine which computers to upgrade to a higher version of LAN Manager. This command is used primarily to provide data to your administrator or technical support personnel.

170

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net View
Purpose The net view command displays a list of servers in a specied domain or the resources that a server in a specied domain is sharing. Syntax net view [\\computername] where computername species a server with shared resources you want to view. To display a list of servers in your workstation domain, logon domain, and other domains, type net view without options. Comments When you type net view without options, you see a list of servers similar to the following:
Server Name Remark \\PRODUCT Production file server \\PRINT1 Printer room, first floor \\SALES Sales records and lists

When you specify a server with net view, you see a list of resources the server is sharing. The display looks similar to the following:
Shared Resources at \\PRINT1 Printer room, first floor Sharename Type Used as Comment PRT Print LPT2: Printer pool FAST_PRT Print LPT1: High priority printer D Disk R: Drive D Root

The columns in this display give the following information: Sharename

The name of the resource.

Type
The type of shared resource.

171

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Used as
The local devicename (if any) assigned to the resource.

Comment
An optional comment about the resource, which an administrator supplies.

Examples
To see a list of servers in your domain, type: net view To see a list of the shared resources on the \\PRODUCT server, type: net view \\product

See Also
For information about See

Shared resources Using a resource shared on a server Who is logged on in a domain

Chapter 1, Getting Started with LAN Manager Enhanced Net Use Net Who

172

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Net Who
Purpose The net who command lists users logged on in a LAN Manager domain, on a LAN Manager server, or on a workstation. It also lists information about a user. It does not show information about Windows NT Advanced Server domains or servers or Windows NT workstations. Syntax net who [/domain:name | \\computername | username] where /domain:name
Lists users on a domain other than the domain in which youre logged on.

computername
Is the name of a server with users you want information about. NOTE: When using this option, the Time since connection is displayed in place of Time since logon.

username
Is the name of a user you want information about.

To display information about users in the logon domain, type net who without options. Comments When you type net who without options, you see a list of users logged on in your LAN Manager logon domain. The display looks similar to the following:
Users on Domain HEADQTRS Time since Username Workstation Logon Full Name ABIGAIL PRODUCT 10:11:45 Abigail Martin ARNIEG FINANCE 06:19:00 Arnold Gates PHILB SALES 11:23:13 Phil Bates

The Workstation column lists the computername of each users workstation.

173

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

NOTE:

The net who command provides information about LAN Manager servers that have LAN Manager version 2.2. You must have administrative privilege on a server that has an earlier version of LAN Manager to get information about that servers users.

Example
To see a list of users currently logged on in the LAN Manager marketing domain, type: net who /domain:marketing

See Also
For information about See

Displaying a list of servers

Net View

174

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Netbind
Purpose The netbind utility binds protocols that are loaded statically. Syntax netbind Comments The netbind utility binds protocols that have been statically loaded, usually by inclusion in the CONFIG.SYS le. The protocols remain bound until you restart your workstation. Do not use netbind while running the Microsoft Windows operating system. Either bind the protocol before running the Windows operating system, or stop the Windows operating system, bind, and then restart the Windows operating system. See Also
For information about See

Loading protocols as TSRs Binding network device drivers

Load, Unload Installation Guide for Clients

175

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Netrun
Purpose The netrun command runs a program or command on a LAN Manager OS/ 2 or UNIX system server.
NOTE: The netrun command does not work on Windows NT Advanced Servers or Windows NT workstations. Also, you cannot use the netrun command to run interactive programs such as word processors or spreadsheets.

Syntax netrun command where command is the name of a program you want to run. On a LAN Manager OS/2 server, the program le must have a .EXE extension. You dont need to supply the lename extension when you type the command. Comments The netrun command lets you use another computers processing power to run a program. You can do this only from the command line. There is no comparable command available with the LAN Manager screen. You may need the help of your administrator to use this command. To run a program on a server
1 2 3 Get the filename of the program you want to run and the computername of the server you want to use. Connect to a shared directory on the server with the net use command if you do not already have such a connection. Change your current directory to any shared directory on the server that has the program you want to run. The program need not be in the directory you change to and might not be visible to you through any other net commands. As long as you are using a directory on that server, you can run the program, even if you cannot see the program file with any directory command or view command. Type netrun followed by the filename of the program and any options or variables the program requires.

176

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

If the program you are running has options or variables that include lenames, specify the full path for each le. If a drive letter is included in the path, LAN Manager assumes that the drive is one of the servers drives. Any les, such as data les, that the program is to use must be on the server from which you use the netrun command. Most programs produce some kind of output or data. When you use netrun, this output is sent to your screen. To send the output to a le, specify >>path to receive the output in the netrun command line. By default, LAN Manager creates this le in the current directory, but any path you specify after the >> symbol is relative to your workstation, not to the server. Commands that can be run with the netrun command are controlled by the Netrun service on the server that has the executable le. Because the Netrun service runs as a daemon process on the UNIX system server without a controlling terminal, and because any command executed by netrun inherits this state, those programs that issue input prompts when they detect that they are being run from the command line will not issue prompts. For example, the shell detects whether there is a controlling terminal and issues the PS1 prompt while waiting for command input. It does not do this when input is not coming from a terminal (for example, when it is running a shell script from a le). When run from netrun, the shell will not issue any prompts. A sample session follows:
D:>> netrun sh date Wed Sep 2 17:20:26 PDT 1992 who root console Aug 24 12:31 exit D:>>

When using the netrun program on an MS-DOS client, the keyboard input is buffered and lines are sent only when the buffer lls or a return is entered. This may require entering a return after some special characters to get them sent across. For example, when entering expressions to the UNIX system bc program, you might type the following:
D:>> netrun bc 3+4 7

If you then intend to exit bc by typing CTRL+D (which would normally terminate bc immediately), you need to follow the CTRL+D with a return to send the CTRL+D to the server.
177

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Example
Suppose you want to run a file-comparison program called DIFF.EXE on the \\ADMIN server with the LISTS shared directory. The two files you want to compare are MAILLIST.TXT and ADDRESS.LST in the LISTS directory, and the file you want to receive the output is NEWLIST.TXT on your drive C. To accomplish this comparison, assign a devicename (such as D) to the LISTS directory on the \\ADMIN server. Change to that drive, and start the program using the netrun command. To do this, type the following: net use d: \\admin\lists d: netrun diff maillist.txt address.lst >>c:\newlist.txt Note that the DIFF.EXE program need not be in the \\ADMIN\LISTS directory.

See Also
For information about See

Connecting to a shared directory Viewing a list of shared directories on a server Other UNIX system commands

Net Use Net View Uchmod, Ud, Udir, Uren

178

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Nwload
Purpose The nwload utility starts NetWare Connectivity. Syntax nwload [username] where username is your NetWare username. Comments NetWare Connectivity allows you to use Novell NetWare servers. You will be prompted for your NetWare username, unless you include it on the command line. You cannot use this utility while the Microsoft Windows operating system is running. Use this utility before you start the Windows operating system, or stop the Windows operating system, use the nwload utility, and then restart the Windows operating system. See Also
For information about See

Unloading NetWare Connectivity NetWare Connectivity

Nwunload Appendix B, Using NetWare Connectivity, and the NetWare Connectivity Guide

179

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Nwunload
Purpose The nwunload utility unloads NetWare Connectivity. Syntax nwunload Comments NetWare Connectivity allows you to use NetWare servers. After you unload NetWare Connectivity with the nwunload utility, you can start NetWare again with the nwload utility. You cannot use this utility while the Microsoft Windows operating system is running. Use this utility before you start the Windows operating system; or stop the Windows operating system, use the nwunload utility, and then restart the Windows operating system. See Also
For information about See

Loading NetWare Connectivity NetWare Connectivity

Nwload Appendix B, Using NetWare Connectivity, and the NetWare Connectivity Guide

180

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Ping
Purpose The ping utility lets users of Microsoft TCP/IP verify a physical connection to a remote computer. Syntax ping remote_computer [t [timeout_value]] [n [num_times]] where remote_computer
Is the computername or IP address of a remote computer.

-t [timeout_value]
Is the number of seconds (timeout_value) that this node waits for an ICMP echo reply from a remote computer. The timeout_value range is from 1 through 300 seconds; the default is 20.

-n [num_times]
Is the number of times ping sends an echo request to the remote computer. If you dont specify a number, ping uses the default of one echo request.

There is a 1-second delay between each echo request. Comments The ping utility is a Microsoft TCP/IP utility that can be used to isolate network hardware problems and incompatible congurations for StarLAN 10 networks, token-ring networks, and ThinLAN networks.

181

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Printsta
Purpose The printsta command accepts print jobs from other workstations and prints them on a shared printer. Syntax printsta options printsta /D where /N:name
Allows you to grant one remote workstation exclusive access to the LAN Manager Print Station printer. If you use this switch, the only remote user who can send print jobs to your printer is the one at the computer with computername name. (Of course, you will still be able to send print jobs to your own printer, too.)

/L:n
Tells LAN Manager Print Station which printer port to use. For example, /L:1 would instruct LAN Manger Print Station to use the printer connected to LPT1. The range is 1 to 3; the default is 1.

/V:n
Redirects printer output from the workstation that is sharing a printer from the port that has the shared printer to the specified logical port, which may be in turn redirected to a queue on a server. You may specify 1 for LPT1, 2 for LPT2, or 3 for LPT3.

/Q
Acts as a toggle to pause and release the queue.

/M:n
Specifies the amount of cache memory reserved for each permitted spool file. When LAN Manager Print Station is loaded, it allocates a memory block (a buffer) for caching the spool le data for each spool le that it may receive over the network. You set the number of spool les that may be created at one time with the /F option. For example, if you set /F:10 and /M:200, when 182

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

LAN Manager Print Station loads, it will allocate 2000 bytes for the buffers that receive data that go into the spool les. In this case, when a print job arrives, LAN Manager Print Station will collect data until it has received 200 bytes; then it will write that data into the spool le, empty the buffer, and receive the next 200 bytes of data from that print job. At any one time, it may be doing this for each of the 10 spool les permitted. Increasing the size of these buffers will reduce the amount of network trafc needed to print a le, but will also increase the amount of memory the LAN Manager Print Station needs. These buffers are allocated from MS-DOS and will not reside in the same place in memory as the print spooler. The size of these buffers should be reduced if memory constraints are a problem. The range is 128 bytes to 4096 bytes; the default is 128 bytes.

/T:n
Sets the priority of LAN Manager Print Station on the host computer. That is, it establishes how successfully LAN Manager Print Station can compete for processing time with other programs that the user of the host computer may be running, by controlling how often it can use the computers processing power. The highest priority is 1. Assigning a lower priority (by increasing this value) will force LAN Manager Print Station to wait longer periods of time in between doing any processing. If using LAN Manager Print Station seems to slow the use of other applications on the workstation, increase this value. If fast print spooling is more important, then assign a higher priority (decrease the value) to give LAN Manager Print Station more processing time. For example, the default value of 10 instructs LAN Manager Print Station to process approximately twice every second. The range is 1 to 255, with 1 being the highest priority. The default is 10.

/I:n
Each time the printsta utility gains control of the computers processing power, it will use n cycles for processing before it relinquishes control again. The range is 1 to 255; the default is 1.

/O:n
Specifies the number of characters to be printed in each pass. The range is 1 to n characters, where n is the value specified with the /M switch. The default is 32.

/A:n
Causes LAN Manager Print Station to disconnect remote clients that have not 183

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

spooled to the printer in the number of minutes specified. The range is 0 (never auto-disconnect) to 1440 minutes; the default is 1 minute.

/R:n
If LAN Manager is loaded in spooling mode, this option (retry) specifies the number of seconds to wait between printer status checks. If the printer is slow, this value should be increased. If LAN Manager Print Station is loaded in non-spooling mode, this option (retry) instructs the spooler to wait for the specied number of seconds before failing the print request. Since the nonspooling mode does not maintain a queue, print jobs that run into a printer error are held until either the error clears or the retry time (n seconds) passes. After n seconds, the print job will fail. After the printer error is determined and corrected, the remote user can send the print job again. It is recommended that /R be set to a small value for the nonspooling mode, since the remote users computer cannot continue any processing until it receives a response to its network print request. The range is 1 to 255 seconds; the default is 5.

/B:n
Configures the maximum number of network buffers that LAN Manager Print Station allocates when it is loaded into memory. Network buffers are used to build network packets for sending data across the network. Each network buffer uses 128 bytes of memory. When there are more network buffers, more information can be sent in each packet, and spool files encounter less competition for the buffer. This can dramatically affect network performance, so low numbers of network buffers should be avoided. The range is 1 to 20 buffers; the default is 5.

/C:n
Specifies the maximum number of remote sessions that can be active at once, that is, the number of net use connections users can establish with the host workstation to use LAN Manager Print Station. Each session takes only 24 bytes of memory. The range is 1 to 20 sessions; the default is 5.

/E
Enables the host workstation to send messages from the printer to the remote user who has sent the print job. 184

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

The default is for the host workstation not to send these messages.

/F:n
Specifies the maximum number of spool files that can be open on the host workstation at once. There is no constraint on how many of these spool files a single remote session can have open. Spool le structures are allocated when LAN Manager Print Station is loaded and take up 64 bytes of memory each. Since one cache block is allocated per spool le, the total memory used for each spool le is actually 64 bytes + the size of the cache block. The size of the cache block is set with the /M option. If possible there should be at least one network buffer allocated for every spool le. Network buffers are set with the /B option. The range for /F is 1 to 10 spool les; the default is 5. To load LAN Manager Print Station in nonspooling mode, set /F:0 (spool les equal to zero).

/K:jobid
Deletes the print job specified by jobid. To obtain the jobid number, either view the queue through Print Manager (if you are using the Windows operating system), or use the command: net print \\hostcomputername\lpt The jobid will appear on the line for the print job you want to delete.

/P:password
Protects the printer share with a password. Only users who know the password will be able to connect to the workstation to use LAN Manager Print Station. The password may be up to 15 characters long.

/S
Enables separator pages. One extra page, with the remote users name, will be printed per print job.

/W:directory
Specifies the working directory where LAN Manager Print Station will keep its spool files. If no option is specified, the directory that was current when LAN Manager Print Station was loaded will be used. By specifying a working directory, you can prevent the user at the host workstation from being distracted or annoyed by the appearance of temporary files in a directory that is reserved for other work. 185

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Generally, you should not delete spool les from the working directory, as doing so could disrupt a remote print job. All spool les are deleted at the end of the print job. This option does not affect LAN Manager Print Station in the nonspooling mode.

/D
Removes LAN Manager Print Station from memory. This option cannot be used with any other options. This will free all memory reserved for caching spool les, as well as freeing the memory used for the program itself. It will cancel any jobs that have not completed and will remove the computername from the networks list of available servers. You can restart LAN Manager Print Station any time after you have successfully removed the program from memory. In some instances, other applications may hook the interrupts that LAN Manager Print Station chained when the program was started. If this happens, the printsta /D command will be unable to unhook those interrupts and will continue to use a small amount of memory to handle them. In this case, you will not be able to restart LAN Manager Print Station until you have rebooted your computer.

Comments The workstation running LAN Manager Print Station must be running MS-DOS version 3.3 or later and LAN Manager version 2.1a or later. LAN Manager Print Station uses only conventional memory. The default conguration uses just over 6K of memory. If you allow more than the default number of spooled les, network buffers, and/or remote connections, or if you increase the cache size, the memory requirements can be as much as 51.4K. If you use the minimal conguration with the spooler enabled, you can reduce the memory requirements to 5.4K. For low-memory congurations, you can disable the spooler, lowering the memory requirements to 5.0K. If disk space is not available for temporary les, it is a good idea to disable the spooler. However, if the spooler is disabled, users who send print jobs to this printer will be unable to use their workstations until their print job is done. LAN Manager Print Station can only be reached via the rst protocol on the workstation sharing the printer. Usually, this is the rst protocol listed in that workstations PROTOCOL.INI le. However, the order of protocols can be
186

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

changed with the wrknets keyword in the [workstation] section of the LANMAN.INI le. The protocol need not be the rst protocol on the remote workstation that is sending the job. For example, if NetBEUI is the rst protocol on the workstation sharing the printer, workstations sending jobs must use NetBEUI as one of their protocols. The workstation sending a print job must establish a network connection to the LAN Manager Print Station host workstation. MS-DOS workstations must be running LAN Manager version 2.0 or later; OS/2 workstations must be running LAN Manager version 2.1a or later. Loading LAN Manager Print Station on the Host Workstation To allow other users to send print jobs to your printer, you must load LAN Manager Print Station as a terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) program, using the printsta command. If necessary, you can also unload the program. LAN Manager Print Station must be loaded prior to the Windows operating system. If you are using the AUTOEXEC.BAT le to load Print Station and to start the Windows operating system, be sure the line to load Print Station comes before the line that starts the Windows operating system, but after the line that starts the Workstation service. To load LAN Manager Print Station
Type printsta [options], where options are those listed in this command reference.

To unload LAN Manager Print Station

Type printsta /d. For details, see the description of the /D option.

To Use LAN Manager Print Station from a Remote Workstation You can connect to a LAN Manager Print Station printer as you would to any other printer, using the computername as the servername and LPT as the sharename. For example, to connect to the printer on the workstation \\WILDWOOD, you would connect one of your logical LPT ports to \\WILDWOOD\LPT.

187

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Examples
To start Print Station with spooling disabled, type: printsta /f:0 To start Print Station, giving remote print jobs minimal priority for processing time, type: printsta /t:255 To start Print Station, allowing up to 5 spool files and 5 buffers, with 500 bytes of cache memory per spool file (2.5K bytes of cache memory will be allocated), type: printsta /f:5 b:5 /m:500

See Also
For information about See

Using printsta Other print spoolers

Chapter 3, Using Shared Printers Clispool, Clipcach

188

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Prtsc
Purpose The prtsc utility is a terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) program used to ush the print spooler when an application has failed to send an end-of-job signal. Syntax prtsc Comments This loads the utility into memory. To ush the spooler, press CTRL+ALT+PRINT SCREEN. The prtsc utility is used to explicitly ush the spooler. Most applications send a signal that is recognized by the spooler as an end-of-job signal. On workstations with LAN Manager Enhanced, the time-out feature will ush the spooler if no data is sent for a specied length of time. If you use this utility, you cannot stop the workstation using the net stop workstation command. See Also
For information about See

Using prtsc

Chapter 3, Using Shared Printers

189

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Uchmod
Purpose The uchmod command allows you to change the UNIX system access permissions of a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems le or directory. This command is only available when you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. Syntax uchmod [who] {{+ | - | = } permissions} pathname uchmod user#group#other# pathname where who
Represents the UNIX system user classification for which access permissions are changed. Replace who with u (user), g (group), o (others), or a (all classifications). When the who option is not specified, all user classifications are changed.

+
Adds the specified access permissions to the specified file or directory.

Removes the specified access permissions from the specified file or directory.

=
Sets access permissions to the groups or access permissions specified in the permissions option.

permissions
Represents the access permissions you want to assign to or remove from the directory or file. Replace permissions with any or all of the following: r (read), w (write), x (execute), l (lockable), s (set ID for user or group), or t (hold text file in swap space).

pathname
Represents the name of the file or directory to be affected. You can use wildcard characters.

190

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

user#
Represents the access permission value for the owner of the file or directory. Replace user# with the sum of any combination of the following values: 4 (for read), 2 (for write), 1 (for execute).

group#
Represents the access permission value for the group. Replace group# with the sum of any combination of the following values: 4 (for read), 2 (for write), 1 (for execute).

other#
Represents the access permission value for other users. Replace other# with the sum of any combination of the following values: 4 (for read), 2 (for write), 1 (for execute).

Comments To access the uchmod command, rst link to the DOSUTIL shared directory on a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server. For example: net use d: \\server1.serve\dosutil Examples
You want to change the group (g) and other (o) access permissions of the file example to read-only. The UNIX system access permissions for example are currently read, write, and execute for user, group, and other (rwxrwxrwx). You type: uchmod go-wx example This changes the access permissions to rwxr--r--. You want to change the user (u) access permissions of the file two to read and execute. The UNIX system access permissions for two are currently read-only for user, group, and other (--x--x--x). You type: uchmod u+r two This changes the access permissions to r-x--x--x. You want to change the other (o) access permissions of the file list to execute only. The UNIX system access permissions for list are currently read-only for user, group, and other (r--r--r--). You type: uchmod o=x list

191

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

This changes the access permissions to r--r----x. You want to change the access permissions of all user classifications for the file milton to read-only, using numbers instead of letters. The UNIX system access permissions for milton are currently 644 (rw-r--r--). You type: uchmod 444 milton This changes the access permissions to r--r--r--.

See Also
For information about See

Using the uchmod command

Appendix C, Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Ud, Udir, Uren Netrun

Other UNIX system commands Executing UNIX system commands

192

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Ud
Purpose The ud command converts a UNIX system text le to MS-DOS format, or an MS-DOS le to UNIX system format. This command is only available when you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. Syntax ud [{-d | -m | -u } -z ] le1 [ le2 ] where -d
Converts the file to MS-DOS format. If the file is already in MS-DOS format, it is copied to the second file.

-u
Converts the file to UNIX system format. If the file is already in UNIX system format, it is copied to the second file.

-z
Prevents ^Z from being appended to the end of a file converted from UNIX system format to MS-DOS format, or ignores ^Z characters in a file being converted from MS-DOS format to UNIX system format.

le1
Represents the name of the file you want to convert. This file remains unchanged after the command is executed.

le2
Represents the name you want to assign to the converted version of the file.

Comments To access the ud command rst link to the DOSUTIL shared directory on a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server. For example, type:
net use d: \\server1.serve\dosutil

193

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

When entered without the -d or -u parameter, ud converts an MS-DOS le to UNIX system format or a UNIX system le to MS-DOS format. If you do not redirect the output to a second le, the le is converted and its text is displayed on your screen. You can also use a pipe ( | ) to send a reformatted le to a program. Examples
To convert a UNIX system file named text.unx to MS-DOS format, and place the output in a file named text.dos, type: ud -d text.unx >> text.dos To convert a UNIX system file named unitext to OS/2 format, then sort the file and place the output in a file named text.srt, type: ud -d unixtext | sort >> text.srt

See Also
For information about See

Using the ud command

Appendix C, Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Uchmod, Udir, Uren Netrun

Other UNIX system commands Executing UNIX system commands

194

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Udir
Purpose The udir command lists les and directories, including those not displayed by the MS-DOS dir command, and displays the UNIX system access permissions. This command is only available if you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. Syntax udir [ -n | -t | -u | -r | -d ] [pathname] where -n
Lists file and directory names only.

-t
Lists the newest files first.

-u
Lists files on the server that are not available to the MS-DOS or OS/2 system.

-r
Displays the files in reverse alphabetical or chronological order.

-d
Displays the directory parameter only.

pathname
Represents the name of the directory and file to be listed. You can use a wildcard character with the filename.

Comments To access the udir command, rst link to the DOSUTIL shared directory on a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server. For example, type:
net use d: \\server1.serve\dosutil

195

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

If a UNIX system lename contains characters that are invalid in MS-DOS or is longer than the MS-DOS limit, you can use udir to list the le. If the specied resource is on a server running the UNIX operating system, udir displays information in a format like that displayed by the UNIX system ls l command. If the specied resource is on a computer running the MS-DOS or OS/2 operating system, udir displays information in a format like that displayed by the MS-DOS dir command.
NOTE: Filenaming conventions are based on the MS-DOS filenaming conventions (the File Allocation Table, or FAT).

Examples
You want to list the contents of the shared directory linked to drive ID F. You type udir f: The following appears.
C: udir f: Status: RO Volume in drive F: is CARPET_SERV Directory of f:/* UNIX-based server 'CARPET.SERVE' in share area 'VACUUM' DOS Name Owner Group Modes UNIX Name . <DIR> 10-28-92 4:45p lanman DOS---- rwxrwxr-x . . . <DIR> 10-22-92 8:51a root root rwxrwxrwx .. 65 10-28-92 4:39p root other rw-r--r-name_too_long NET.DIR <DIR> 10-24-92 9:13a glenn DOS---- rwxrwxr-x net.dir OK_FOR.DOS 232 10-28-92 1:51p glenn DOS-a-rw-rwlr-ok_for.dos ROOTFILE 642950 10-25-92 2:19p root other rw-r--r-- rootfile 6 Files 150.72 Megabytes freeu

You want to list the contents of the current directory on your local drive C. You type udir

196

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

The following appears:

C:\udir Volume in drive C: is DOS401 Directory of C:\. autoexec.bat rw--a 145 6-08-92 config.sys rw--a 344 6-08-92 landoc rw--a <DIR> 8-10-92 dos3_2 rw--<DIR> 6-10-92 ibmdos.com r-hsa 28009 9-12-92 report1.dft rw--a 8128 8-02-92 report2.dft rw--a 9012 8-16-92 res.scr rw--a 2045 8-08-92 tmp rw--a 23606 1-01-92 9 Files 26.78 Megabytes free

10:05a 9:30a 7:30a 11:08a 3:45p 5:30p 9:30a 8:30p

See Also
For information about See

Using the udir command

Appendix C, Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Uchmod, Ud, Uren Netrun

Other UNIX system commands Executing UNIX commands

197

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Unload
Purpose The unload utility unloads a specied protocol from a workstation with Demand Protocol Architecture (DPA). Syntax unload protocol where protocol
Is the name of the last protocol loaded. Information regarding protocols is placed in the PROTOCOL.INI file and in the LANMAN.DOS\DRIVERS\PROTOCOL directory by the installation program. You should not edit these files.

Comments Protocols must be unloaded in the reverse of the order in which they were loaded (last in is rst out). To get information about what protocols are loaded, and in what order, type:
load /i

Do not use the unload utility while running the Microsoft Windows operating system. Either unload the protocol before running the Windows operating system, or stop the Windows operating system, unload the protocol, and then restart the Windows operating system. See Also
For information about See

Other Demand Protocol Architecture utilities Loading a protocol Installing and conguring protocols

Load, Netbind, Installation Guide for Clients Load Installation Guide for Clients

198

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Uren
Purpose The uren command renames or moves les on a server running the UNIX operating system. This command is only available if you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. Syntax uren oldlename newlename uren lename1 [ lename2... ] directoryname where oldlename
Represents the original filename.

newlename
Is the new filename.

lename1
Represents the name of the file you want to move.

lename2...
Represents any additional files that you want to move.

directoryname
Is the name of the destination directory.

Comments To access the uren command, rst link to the DOSUTIL shared directory on a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server. For example:
net use d: \\server1.serve\dosutil

You cannot use the uren command to move a le from one drive to another. In addition, you cannot use the wildcard character * with the uren command.

199

Enhanced Reference Command and Utility Summary

Examples
You want to rename TOOBIGFORDOS to OKFORDOS. Type uren toobigfordos okfordos You want to move files ABC and DEF to the DIR1 directory. Type uren abc def dir1

See Also
For information about See

Using the uren command

Appendix C, Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Uchmod, Ud, Udir Netrun

Other UNIX system commands Executing UNIX system commands

200

Using LAN Manager Basic

201

Using LAN Manager Basic

This chapter explains how to start and use LAN Manager Basic, get online Help, connect to directories and printers over a local area network, and print jobs over the network. Instructions for viewing, pausing, and continuing your workstations network connections are included. For information about LAN Manager Enhanced, see Part 1, LAN Manager Enhanced.

202

Using LAN Manager Basic Starting LAN Manager Basic

Starting LAN Manager Basic

When you turn on your computer, LAN Manager Basic begins automatically. You can connect to resources on the network, for example, sharing les with other network users and using remote printers as though they were attached directly to your own workstation. Some connections may be made for you automatically; you can make other connections yourself. If the persistent connections feature is in effect on your workstation, the connections you have when you log out will be restored the next time you log on. For more information, see your network administrator.

203

Using LAN Manager Basic Getting Help

Getting Help
LAN Manager Basic gives you two kinds of Help: a listing of all the commands for which Help is available and information about a specic command.
To see a list of LAN Manager Basic commands and an explanation of their syntax Type net help.

There are two ways to get Help for a specic command:

Type net help followed by the command name. (Dont type net as part of the command name.) Type the full command name followed by help.

For example, you can type

net help print

Or
net print help

204

Using LAN Manager Basic Using Shared Directories

Using Shared Directories

With LAN Manager Basic, you can use a shared directory in much the same way you use a directory or disk on your workstation. For example, you can use the les and applications in a shared directory as though they were stored on your workstations hard disk. LAN Manager Basic gives you access to shared directories in two ways. You can connect your workstation to a shared directory by assigning a disk devicename to the directory. You can also specify the shared directory as part of a path in some MS-DOS commands. These procedures are explained in the following two sections. In both cases, the shared directory is identied by a network path. A network path is a servers computername followed by a sharename. A sharename is a name that identies a shared resource (directory or printer queue). When you type a network path from the command line, two backslashes (\\) precede the computername, and another backslash precedes the sharename. For instance, \\PRODUCT\REPORTS species a network path for the REPORTS shared directory on the \\PRODUCT server.

Connecting to a Shared Directory

You can connect your workstation to a shared directory by assigning a devicename to it. A devicename is a letter followed by a colon (for example, D:). You use the devicename to gain access to the shared directory, just as you use A: to gain access to a oppy disk drive on your workstation. Devicenames A: through Z: are available for assigning to shared directories.
NOTE: If you assign a local drive devicename to a disk drive on the network, your workstation recognizes the network connection rather than the local drive, unless the network connection is paused or disconnected. To connect to a shared directory Type net use devicename: \\computername\sharename.

205

Using LAN Manager Basic Using Shared Directories

For example, to assign the S: devicename to the MIDWEST shared directory on the \\SALES server, type:
net use s: \\sales\midwest

If you make a mistake in typing a command or if you specify an incorrect network path when connecting to a shared directory, the following error messages may appear:
Connection refused or syntax error

Network name not found

Some resources require you to supply a password to make a connection. If you dont supply a password when one is required, the following error message appears:
Access denied

To learn how to supply passwords, see Using Passwords, later in this section. After you establish a connection, you no longer need to specify the network path to gain access to the shared directory. Instead, specify the devicename you assigned to the directory. For instance, if you assign S: to the \\SALES\MIDWEST directory, S: represents the network connection in the same way C: represents your workstations hard disk drive. You can change the current drive to S: and use the shared directory as though it were one of your workstations disk drives. Using Passwords You may have to type a password with net use to gain access to a shared directory. In order to gain access, your computername must be the same as your username, and you must know the password for the directory. To check your computername
Type net name.

If it is not the same as your username, see the net name command for information on changing your computername. Your administrator can give you the correct password for the directory you want to use.

206

Using LAN Manager Basic Using Shared Directories

There are two ways to supply the password:

Type the password at the end of the net use command. For example, to supply the password region while assigning S: to the MIDWEST shared directory on the \\SALES server, type: net use s: \\sales\midwest region Type an asterisk (*) instead of the password at the end of the command. LAN Manager Basic then prompts you for a password. For example, to substitute an asterisk for the password in the previous example, type: net use s: \\sales\midwest * The following prompt appears:
Password:

Type the password at the prompt. The password doesnt appear on the screen when you type it in in response to the prompt, which keeps the password condential.

Using MS-DOS Commands with Shared Directories

You can use the network path of a shared resource as part of a path in some MS-DOS commands. In this case, LAN Manager Basic connects to the server sharing the directory when the command is performed, provided the directory doesnt require a password. You dont have to assign a devicename to a shared directory when the network path is used as part of an MS-DOS command. When a devicename is assigned, you can specify the devicename rather than the network path in the command. You can also use a le in a shared directory with any application that runs under MS-DOS. For example, to edit the LIST.DOC le in the \\SALES\MIDWEST directory with Microsoft Word, type:
word \\sales\midwest\list.doc

207

Using LAN Manager Basic Using Shared Directories

NOTE:

If you want to use a shared directory in an MS-DOS command but the directory requires a password, you must type net use, the network path, and the password. You dont need to specify a devicename.

You cannot use network paths with the following MS-DOS commands:
dir copy

However, after youve assigned a devicename to a remote directory (for example, D:), you can use the dir and copy commands as you do with a local subdirectory. The following MS-DOS commands, which read from and write to a disk, cannot be used with shared directories and their les:
chkdsk diskcopy format join recover subst sys

If you try to use a command that reads from or writes to a disk with a shared directory, the following message appears:
Cannot [command] a Network drive

where
[command]

is the name of the command you typed.

Disconnecting From a Shared Directory

You can disconnect your workstation from a shared directory when you nish using it or when you want to assign the devicename to another resource.

208

Using LAN Manager Basic Using Shared Directories

To disconnect your workstation from a shared directory

Type net use devicename: /delete. You can abbreviate the /delete option as /d.

For example, to disconnect D: from a shared directory, type:

net use d: /delete

209

Using LAN Manager Basic Using Shared Printers

Using Shared Printers

With LAN Manager Basic, you can use shared printers by connecting your workstation to a shared printer queue. A printer queue manages print jobs by collecting the les that users want to print and sending them to a printer in the order theyre received. Incoming jobs are held in the queue until the printer is ready to print them. When you connect your workstation to a shared printer queue, you send print jobs to the queue just as you send print jobs to a printer attached to your workstation.

Connecting to a Shared Printer Queue

You can connect your workstation to a printer queue by assigning the queue a devicename. Devicenames LPT1 through LPT3 are available for assigning to printer queues. To connect your workstation to a printer queue
Type net use devicename: \\computername\queue.

For example, to assign LPT1 to the PRINT1 printer queue on the \\FINANCE server, type:
net use lpt1: \\finance\print1

When you use a devicename that is also assigned to a printer at your workstation, your workstation recognizes only the network connection when you use the devicename. To get your workstation to recognize the printer that is attached to your workstation, you must disconnect or pause the connection to the shared printer queue. For more information about disconnecting and pausing, see Net Use and Net Pause in Chapter 7, Basic Reference.

210

Using LAN Manager Basic Using Shared Printers

NOTE:

You may need to supply a password with net use to gain access to a shared printer queue. For more information about supplying passwords, see Using Passwords, earlier in this chapter.

Printing over the Network

After you assign a devicename to a shared printer queue, there are two ways to print a le over the network. You can print a le from within an application, or you can send a closed le directly to the devicename. To print a le
1 2 To print from a software application, set up the file to print to the devicename you assigned to the shared printer queue. Then print as you normally would. To send a closed file to a devicename you assigned to a printer queue, type: net print filename devicename: For example, to send the STATUS.DOC le to the printer queue connected to LPT1:, type: net print status.doc lpt1:

Viewing the Status of a Print Job

You can view the contents of a shared printer queue connected to a device, or you can view the contents of all the printer queues on a server. To view the contents of a shared printer queue connected to a devicename
Type net print devicename:.

For example, to view the printer queue that connects to LPT1, type:
net print lpt1:

To view the contents of a servers printer queues

Type net print \\computername.

For example, to view the contents of printer queues on the \\FINANCE server, type:
net print \\finance

211

Using LAN Manager Basic Using Shared Printers

You dont need a connection to a server to view the contents of its queues. When you specify either a devicename or a computername, a display similar to the following appears:
Pos ID Size Date Time Name Status 001 268 115074 07-15-92 16:20 ANDREWS Printing 002 269 65174 07-15-92 16:22 KATIEMC Waiting 003 270 34594 07-15-92 16:25 SETHJ Waiting 004 271 103465 07-15-92 16:28 CAROLR Waiting

For each print job, the position in the queue, identication number, size (in bytes), date, time, owner, and status display.

Disconnecting from a Shared Printer Queue

You can disconnect your workstation from a shared printer queue when you nish using the resource or when you want to use the connection for another resource. To disconnect from a shared printer queue
Type net use devicename: /delete. You can abbreviate the /delete option as /d.

For example:
net use lpt1: /d

If a Print Job Fails to Send an End-of-Job Signal

In some cases, an application may not send an end-of-job signal that is recognized by the print spooler. Without this signal, the spooler cannot pass the job to the printer, and the spooler is not free to accept other jobs. The prtsc utility solves this problem. The prtsc utility is a terminate-andstay-resident (TSR) program. To load this utility, type:
prtsc

at the command line. To load the utility automatically, include it in the wrkservices entry and also in the [services] section of the LANMAN.INI le. For example, if prtsc is included in the wrkservices entry:
wrkservices = messenger,netpopup,prtsc,encrypt

212

Using LAN Manager Basic Using Shared Printers

the [services] section should include the following:

prtsc = netprog\prtsc.exe

If the workstation has prtsc, you can release the print job by pressing CTRL+ALT+PRINT SCREEN.

213

Using LAN Manager Basic Listing Connections to Network Resources

Listing Connections to Network Resources

You can view your connections to shared directories and printer queues during a working session. To view the status of your workstations connections or the names of the shared devicenames and resources youre using
Type net use. A display similar to the following appears:
Local Network Status Device Name D: \\FINANCE\SYS E: \\SALES\SUSANKO F: \\FINANCE\APPS ERROR LPT1: \\FINANCE\LASERJET

The listing shows all of the network resources connected to your workstation. If ERROR appears in the Status column, the connection is no longer active or was suspended by the server. In this case, you may need to delete the connection and connect to the resource again.

214

Using LAN Manager Basic Pausing and Continuing Connections

Pausing and Continuing Connections

Occasionally, you may want to pause network connections to use devicenames for your workstations own disk drives or printers. To pause network connections
To pause connections to all shared directories, type net pause drdr. To pause connections to all shared printer queues, type net pause prdr. To continue connections to all shared directories, type net continue drdr. To continue connections to all shared printer queues, type net continue prdr.

For example, if you assign your workstations LPT1 devicename to a shared printer, you cant use LPT1 for a local printer. To pause this connection, type:
net pause prdr

You can now use LPT1 for the printer attached to your workstation.
NOTE: Pausing one printer connection pauses all printer connections.

When you want to use the shared printer again, type:

net continue prdr

Your connections to shared printer queues reactivate.

215

Using LAN Manager Basic Managing a Shared Printer

Managing a Shared Printer

NOTE: Read this section only if a shared printer is attached to your workstation. If you have a printer attached to your workstation but are unsure if it is a shared printer, ask your administrator.

If a shared printer is attached to your workstation, follow the guidelines in the next section when using the printer. These guidelines not only ensure that you get the most out of your printer but also ensure that it is accessible to users at other workstations on the network. In addition to following these guidelines, you and your administrator often share responsibility for managing the shared printer. This section describes the following:
Guidelines for using a shared printer attached to your workstation Your administrators responsibilities for managing a shared printer Your responsibilities for managing a shared printer Maintaining a link to the server Disabling and enabling the printer

Information on troubleshooting shared printers is provided in Appendix D, Troubleshooting.

Recommendations for Using a Shared Printer

Follow these recommendations when using your shared printer:
Access your printer as a shared resource rather than a local resource. Accessing the printer as a shared resource enables you to: Hold print jobs. Supply reset sequences for the printer. Print banner pages. Use the server as a personal print spooler, queueing jobs before printing.

Always use an unused port ID when you link to the printer queue on the server. Using the port ID that connects your printer to your workstation will prevent your

216

Using LAN Manager Basic Managing a Shared Printer

job and other jobs from printing. For example, if you have a shared printer attached to the LPT1 (or PRN) port on your workstation, link to the printer queue (or to other shared printer queues) using LPT2 or another port ID. If you must use your printer locally, use the MS-DOS print command, or disable the printer as a network resource and use it locally. For more information about the MS-DOS print command, see your MS-DOS manual. For information on disabling the printer, see Disabling and Enabling the Printer, later in this section.

Administrators Responsibilities
Your administrator is often responsible for connecting the shared printer to your computer and ensuring that the appropriate LAN Manager Spooler Agent software is automatically loaded on your workstation. LAN Manager supports two workstation print spooling programs:
The LAN Manager Print Station utility (the printsta command) shares a workstations printer with one other workstation at a time, without involvement of a server. The LAN Manager Clispool program (the clispool command) supports the print spooler (the print command) that comes with MS-DOS. This program is only available if you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. The LAN Manager Clipcach program (the clipcach command) supports the print spooler that comes with LaserTools PrintCache version 2.4a. This program is only available if you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network.

NOTE:

LaserTools PrintCache must be purchased separately.

The Clispool and Clipcach programs receive print jobs sent through the server from workstations and pass them to the appropriate print spooling program for printing. For more information about the clispool and clipcach commands, see Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference. For more information about the LaserTools PrintCache software, see the LaserTools PrintCache manual. With clispool and clipcach, your administrator is also responsible for maintaining the printer queue (including such tasks as deleting jobs from other users) and for setting printer parameters.

217

Using LAN Manager Basic Managing a Shared Printer

For more information about the printsta command, see Chapter 7, Basic Reference.

Your Responsibilities
You are responsible for the following tasks:
Maintaining the printers link to the server Disabling the printer when necessary

When you use the LAN Manager Print Station utility, you are fully responsible for the printer; print jobs come directly to your workstation and not through an intermediary server. The remainder of this section provides information for maintaining the printer as a shared resource. Of course, the printer also requires the same routine maintenance any printer requires, such as maintaining the paper supply and replacing the ribbon or toner. For information about routine printer maintenance, see the guide packaged with your printer.
Maintaining the Link to the Server for Clispool or Clipcach

When a user sends a print job to the shared printer connected to your workstation, the server automatically establishes a link between itself and your workstation. This link uses the drive ID specied by your administrator. You do not need to establish this link yourself. When you boot your workstation and automatically load the printing programs, the drive ID used for shared printing is displayed, along with a copyright notice. Do not use this drive ID for another link, because you might disrupt a print job. Disabling and Enabling the Printer You can disable the printer by turning it off or by using the clispool or clipcach command, depending on which print spooler you use. You may need to turn your printer off if it needs to be serviced. You may want to disable your printer using the clispool or clipcach command if you need exclusive use of the printer or if you must use the printer locally. The printer queue continues to accept jobs, but the jobs will not print until you re-enable the printer.

218

Using LAN Manager Basic Managing a Shared Printer

NOTE:

If you want to use your printer locally without disabling it, use the print command. For example, type print myfile. At most, one print job from the server may print before your job is printed.

Turning Off the Power If you turn off your workstation or printer, any print jobs sent to the printer will accumulate in the printer queue on the server. These jobs will start printing when your workstation and printer are turned on again. To disable the printer
Type clispool /d or clipcach /d and press ENTER.

To enable the printer

Type clispool /e or clipcach /e and press ENTER.

Using the Print Station Utility

When the LAN Manager Print Station utility is started on a workstation, the workstation appears as a server to the network. This allows other users to connect to the printer, as they would to any other network printer. However, you cannot view the queue with the net view command. In the default implementation of LAN Manager Print Station, print jobs are written to a le on the host computer (the one running printsta) and then sent to the printer. This process, called spooling, allows the person sending the print job to regain control of his or her computer without waiting for the job to print. If the disk space for temporary print les is not available, you can load LAN Manager Print Station with spooling disabled. Printing takes place as a background task on the host computer; the person using that workstation is not interrupted by print jobs from other users. The Netpopup or Winpopup utility sends messages to the host workstation when the LAN Manager Print Station encounters errors such as printer out of paper. If you load Print Station in nonspooling mode, or if print jobs will be spooled from workstations running OS/2, you should not have messages sent to the host workstation. Loading Print Station in nonspooling mode automatically disables Netpopup or Winpopup. If jobs will be spooled from workstations running OS/2, disable Netpopup or Winpopup manually.
219

Using LAN Manager Basic Managing a Shared Printer

Disabling and Enabling the Printer You can disable the printer by turning it off or by using the printsta command. You may need to turn your printer off if it needs to be serviced. You may want to disable your printer using the printsta /d command if you need exclusive use of the printer or if you must use the printer locally. The printer queue continues to accept jobs, but the jobs will not print until you re-enable the printer. For more information, see Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference, or Chapter 7, Basic Reference.

220

Basic Reference
This chapter contains a reference page for every LAN Manager Basic command and utility. Each page describes the purpose and syntax of the command or utility.

221

Basic Reference Abbreviating Commands and Options

Abbreviating Commands and Options

The reference pages in this chapter spell out all command and service names. If a command can be abbreviated, its abbreviation is listed on the reference page for the command. You can abbreviate any command option by typing enough letters to distinguish it from the commands other options.

222

Basic Reference Using the /Yes and /No Options

Using the /Yes and /No Options

Many LAN Manager Basic commands require conrmation to complete a task. To expedite this conrmation, you can append the /yes or /no option to the command. The /yes and /no options can be abbreviated /y and /n. For example, the net logon command logs you on to the network. But when another user is already logged on at the workstation you are using, you must log off that user before you can log on. To log on at a workstation at which another user is also logged on (your username is chrisj and your password is daffodil), type:
net logon chrisj daffodil

Be careful that no one sees your password. So that no one sees your password as you type, you can use an asterisk (*) instead of your password. In this example you would type:
net logon chrisj *

If you use the asterisk, you will be prompted for your password. The password does not appear on the screen when you type it in response to the prompt. LAN Manager Basic returns a series of prompts asking you to conrm logging off the current user and canceling the workstations existing connections. You must respond to each prompt by typing y or pressing ENTER before you can proceed with the logon. To log on without prompts, add the /y option to the net logon command. Type:
net logon chrisj daffodil /y

Remember, you can protect your password by substituting an asterisk (*). In this example, you would type:
net logon chrisj * /y

The only prompt you will receive will be the prompt for your password.

223

Basic Reference Using Passwords with Commands

Using Passwords with Commands

Some commands require a password to connect to a shared resource. With LAN Manager Basic, there are two ways to supply a password:
Type the password with the command. For example, to provide the password petunia while assigning LPT1 to the LISTS shared directory on the \\ADMIN server, type:
net use lpt1: \\admin\lists petunia

Type an asterisk (*) instead of the password. When you type an asterisk instead of a password, LAN Manager Basic prompts you for the password. For example, type:
net use lpt1: \\admin\lists *

LAN Manager Basic then displays this prompt:

Type the password for \\ADMIN\LISTS:

When you type the password at this prompt, the letters are not displayed. This keeps the password condential.

224

Basic Reference Controlling a Screen Display

Controlling a Screen Display

Some commands (for example, net help) produce more than one screenful of text. In these cases, the screen scrolls automatically until you stop it. To stop the display from scrolling
Press PAUSE or CTRL+S.

To resume scrolling
Press any key.

You can also use the MS-DOS more command to scroll one screen at a time. For example, to display one screenful of Help text at a time, type:
net help start workstation | more

Be sure to type the vertical bar, or pipe. To display another screenful, press any key at the --More-- prompt.

225

Basic Reference Using Commands in Batch Programs

Using Commands in Batch Programs

LAN Manager Basic commands can be used in batch programs (.BAT les), such as AUTOEXEC.BAT. For example, you can group the commands for starting the Workstation service, logging on to the network, and making network connections in one executable program. Command options can also be included in batch programs. To avoid confusion, do not abbreviate command options when putting commands in a batch program.
NOTE: To maintain network security, do not put your password in a batch program. Instead, use an asterisk (*) where the password would go, to be prompted for the password when the batch program is run. The password will not be displayed as you type it.

226

Basic Reference Command and Utility Summary

Command and Utility Summary

The following list describes the LAN Manager Basic commands and utilities:
To Connect to a shared resource Disconnect from a shared resource View a list of Help topics Get Help for a specic command See the contents of a shared printer queue Learn what workstation connections are in effect Start a workstation and assign a computername Assign a computername to a workstation See the computername of a workstation Pause connections to shared resources Continue a service Load a different network protocol Bind a protocol that has been loading statically Unload a network protocol (breaking any connections that use it) Flush the print spooler, releasing a print job that has no end-of-job signa Access resources across a gateway (TCP/IP to TCP/IP) Check physical network connections (TCP/IP) Print jobs on a shared printer without using a server to spool the jobs Use this command net use net use net help net help command net print net use net start workstation net name net name net pause net continue load* netbind* unload* lprtsc* addname* ping* printsta

227

Basic Reference Command and Utility Summary

To Start NetWare using LAN Manager NetWare Connectivity Stop NetWare using LAN Manager NetWare Connectivity Print jobs on a shared printer using LaserTools PrintCache software Print jobs on a shared printer using the MS-DOS print command Enable a workstation to emulate a terminal when working with a LAN Manager UNIX Systems server

Use this command nwload* nwunload* clipcach** clispool** kermit**

*This is a utility. **These commands are only available when you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network.

228

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Using UNIX System Commands

The following list describes LAN Manager Basic commands you can use to work with a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server:
To Change a users permissions for a directory or le Convert a UNIX system text le to MS-DOS List les or directories and display UNIX system access permissions Rename or move a le using the UNIX operating system Run a program or command on a LAN Manager server Use this command uchmod* ud* udir* uren* netrun*

These commands are only available when you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network.

229

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Addname
Purpose The addname utility lets users of Microsoft TCP/IP access resources of a server on a different TCP/IP network, using a network gateway. Syntax addname computername ipaddress addname computername /delete addname /load | /save [lename] where computername
Is the name of the remote server whose entry you want to add or delete. Computernames can have as many as 15 characters. These computernames do not affect the assignment of any local computername or username.

ipaddress
Is the IP address that corresponds to computername. If the computername is stored in the LMHOSTS file, the new IP address temporarily replaces the existing IP address.

/delete
Deletes the specified computername from the workstations list of current entries but not from the LMHOSTS file.

/load
Loads a set of entries from the specified file. All current entries are deleted, and all entries in the specified file are added. If there is not enough room for all new entries in the file, an error is reported, and no changes are made to the list of current entries. If you dont specify a filename, the default LMHOSTS file is used.

/save
Stores the list of current entries in the specified file. All entries in the file are overwritten by the current entries. If you dont specify a filename, the default LMHOSTS file is used. To delete an entry from the default addname configuration file, use addname /save after deleting the entry.

230

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

lename
Specifies the name of the file to load or save.

When you type addname with no options, the list of current addname entries is displayed. Comments When your computer is congured as a LAN Manager workstation using Microsoft TCP/IP, you can use the addname utility to access the resources of a server that are on another TCP/IP network accessible through a network gateway. The addname utility matches remote LAN Manager servernames to their IP addresses. The addname utility temporarily adds entries to your workstations memory. These entries are deleted when you unload Microsoft TCP/IP from memory or when you restart your computer. To save the entries in the LMHOSTS le, use the /save option. The addname utility can be used only when the Microsoft TCP/IP software and the NetBIOS network software are loaded into your workstations memory. You can add as many as four entries using addname. Examples
To temporarily add the server FLAMINGO, whose IP address is 15.6.127.8, type: addname flamingo 15.6.127.8 To see the list of current entries, type: addname To save the list of current entries in the LMHOSTS file, type: addname /save To delete the server FLAMINGO from the LMHOSTS file, type: addname flamingo /delete To load new entries from the file A:\USER\MYHOSTS, type: addname /load a:\user\myhosts This command deletes all existing LMHOSTS entries before adding all entries from A:\USER\MYHOSTS. If there are more than 63 entries in A:\USER\MYHOSTS, an error occurs, and no changes are made to the list of current entries. 231

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Clipcach
Purpose The clipcach command enables an MS-DOS workstation to receive network print jobs from a server and to print these jobs on a shared printer physically connected to the workstation, using the LaserTools PrintCache software. This command is only available when you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. Syntax clipcach /i /s:driveid [any | \\servername] [ /d | /e] clipcach [any | \\servername] [/d | /e] where /i
Loads clipcach into memory. To load clipcach, use this option only after you boot the workstation.

/s:driveid
Specifies the drive ID that clipcach will use to link to its spool directory on the server. Replace driveid with the drive ID that clipcach is to use. To load clipcach, use this option only after you boot the workstation. Do not add the colon after the drive ID, for example, enter only N for driveid.

any
Allows clipcach to accept print requests from any server. Unless you specify otherwise, any is the default when you load clipcach.

servername
Represents the name of the server from which clipcach will accept print requests. Replace servername with the name of the server from which clipach will accept print requests.

/d
Temporarily disables clipcach. Network print jobs will be submitted to the queue but will not print while clipcach is disabled. The printer can continue to be used locally, however.

232

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

/e
Re-enables clipcach. Network print jobs will now be printed.

Comments Clipcach is an MS-DOS terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) program that runs on the workstation to which a shared printer is connected. Clipcach requires that the LaserTools PrintCache software be installed and loaded on the workstation to which the printer is connected. To receive print jobs from a server, clipcach automatically links to a shared spool directory on the server. Placing PrintCache in raw or cooked mode is accomplished by using command-line switches to the PrintCache print command. In raw mode, tabs are not expanded and ^Z is not interpreted as the end of the le. In most cases, raw mode is acceptable for printing text les. Graphics les will not print while PrintCache is in cooked mode. Cooked mode may be required occasionally to print text les containing tabs if neither the printer nor the application generating the print job expands tabs. See the LaserTools PrintCache manual for more information. Examples
To start the Clipcach program automatically and use the N: drive, add the following line to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file: clipcach /i /s:N A shared printer is attached to your workstation and you want to use it locally. To do this you disable clipcach by typing: clipcach /d With clipcach disabled, you can use your printer locally. Network print jobs will be submitted to the queue on the server but will only be printed while clipcach is enabled. When you are done using the printer locally, and want it to be used over the network, you enable clipcach by typing: clipcach /e Network print jobs will now be printed. The shared printer attached to your workstation accepts print jobs from all the servers on your local area network. One of your coworkers needs to print out

233

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

several files as soon as possible. Your co-worker will be sending these print requests from the server PRINT1.SERVE. To make sure that his or her files are printed in a timely manner, you allow the shared printer to accept requests from the PRINT1.SERVE server only by typing: clipcach \\print1.serve Once the files have printed, you once again allow the shared printer to accept print requests from all of the servers on the local area network by typing: clipcach any

See Also
For information about Using clipcach Other print spoolers See Chapter 6, Using LAN Manager Basic Clispool; Printsta

234

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Clispool
Purpose The clispool command enables an MS-DOS workstation to receive network print jobs from a server and to print these jobs on a shared printer physically connected to the workstation, using the MS-DOS print command. This command is only available when you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. Syntax clispool /i /s:driveid [any | \\servername] [/r | /c] [/d | /e] where /i
Loads clispool into memory. To load clispool, use this option only after you boot the workstation.

/s:driveid
Specifies the drive ID that clispool will use to link to its spool directory on the server. Replace driveid with the drive ID that clispool is to use. To load clispool, use this option only after you boot the workstation. Do not add a colon after the drive ID, for example, enter only N for driveid.

any
Allows clispool to accept print requests from any server. Unless you specify otherwise, any is the default when you load clispool.

servername
Represents the name of the server from which clispool will accept print requests. Replace servername with the name of the server from which clispool will accept print requests.

/r
Places the MS-DOS print command into raw mode, which permits the printing of graphics files. In raw mode, tabs are not expanded and ^Z is not interpreted as the end of the file. In most cases, raw mode also is acceptable for printing text files, since tabs in text files are usually expanded by the printer or the application generating the print job. Unless you specify otherwise, raw mode is the default whenever you load clispool.

235

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

/c
Places the MS-DOS print command into cooked mode. In cooked mode, tabs are expanded, and ^Z is interpreted as the end of the file. Graphics files will not print while print is in cooked mode. Cooked mode may be required occasionally to print text files containing tabs if neither the printer nor the application generating the print job expands tabs.

/d
Temporarily disables clispool. Network print jobs will be submitted to the queue but will not print while clispool is disabled. The printer can continue to be used locally, however.

/e
Re-enables clispool. Network print jobs will now be printed.

Comments To access the clispool command, rst link to the appropriate shared directory. This command is stored in the DOSUTIL shared directory on a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server. To perform this command, you must rst link to this shared directory as in the following example:
net use d: \\server1.serve\dosutil

Clispool is a MS-DOS terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) program that runs on the workstation to which a shared printer is connected. Clispool requires that the MS-DOS print command be installed and loaded on the workstation to which the printer is connected. To receive print jobs from a server, clispool automatically links to a shared spool directory on the server. Examples
To start the clispool program automatically and use the N: drive, add the following line to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file: clispool /i /s:N A shared printer is attached to your workstation and you want to use it locally. To do this you disable clispool by typing: clispool /d

236

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

With clispool disabled, you can use your printer locally. Network print jobs will be submitted to the printers queue but will only be printed while clispool is enabled. When you are done using the printer locally and want it to be used over the network, you enable clispool by typing: clispool /e Network print jobs will now be printed. The shared printer attached to your workstation accepts print jobs from all the servers on your local area network. For example, one of your coworkers needs to print out several files as soon as possible. Your coworker will be sending these print requests from the server PRINT1.SERVE. To make sure that his files are printed in a timely manner, you allow the shared printer to accept requests from the PRINT1.SERVE server only by typing: clispool \\print1.serve Once the files have printed, you once again allow the shared printer to accept print requests from all of the servers on the local area network by typing: clispool any

See Also
For information about Using clispool Other print spoolers See Chapter 6, Using LAN Manager Basic Clipcach; Printsta

237

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Kermit
Purpose The kermit command enables an MS-DOS workstation to emulate a terminal in order to log on to a UNIX system host computer, upload and download les with a host that is also running Kermit, or exchange les with another workstation running the Kermit terminal emulator. This command is only available when you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. Syntax kermit [command, ... ] where command
Is any valid Kermit command.

Comments To access the kermit command, rst link to the appropriate shared directory. This command is stored in the DOSUTIL shared directory on a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server. To perform this command, you must rst link to this shared directory as in the following example:
net use d: \\server1.serve\dosutil

The kermit command is a full-featured terminal emulator and le transfer utility. For more information on Kermit, see Appendix C, Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server. For a complete description of all the options and features, see your Kermit documentation. The functions provided by Kermit allow you to:
Create and use Kermit command scripts to automatically log on and transfer files. Redefine the keyboard so that any key can send any character or string while you

238

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

communicate with a host computer. Define Kermit command macros. Start Kermit and execute Kermit commands from a batch file. Transfer files between two workstations running Kermit, and execute certain MS-DOS commands remotely between the workstations. Use Kermit over the local area network or over a serial port. Change the type of terminal Kermit emulates and set terminal attributes. Use your printer from Kermit. Customize the colors in the Kermit screen.

Source code for Kermit on many different computers and operating systems is available from Columbia University, which holds the copyright to the le transfer protocol and to many Kermit implementations.

239

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Load
Purpose The load utility loads the specied protocol on workstations using Demand Protocol Architecture (DPA). Syntax load protocol [/i] where protocol
Is the name of the protocol to be loaded. Information regarding protocols is placed in the PROTOCOL.INI file and in LANMAN.DOS\DRIVERS\PROTOCOL by the installation program. You should not edit these files yourself.

/i
Displays a list of loaded protocols and the order in which they were bound.

Comments By default, the network (and protocol) is specied in the AUTOEXEC.BAT le. The load utility allows you to load protocols as you need them. Do not use the load utility while running the Microsoft Windows operating system. Either load the protocol before running the Windows operating system, or stop the Windows operating system, load the protocol, and then restart the Windows operating system. You may need to load a secondary protocol to access certain network resources. If you were using such a resource when you logged out, and the required protocol is not automatically loaded when you log on again, and you are using the persistent connections feature, you will receive a message that the resource is unavailable. You will be able to reconnect to the resource after you load the required protocol.

240

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

NOTE:

In order to use the Demand Protocol Architecture (DPA) to load protocols, the line dynamic = yes must be included in the [protman] section of the PROTOCOL.INI file. Also, in the CONFIG.SYS file, the line specifying the protocols to be used must come before the line that begins device = and contains \protman.dos.

See Also
For information about See Unload

Unloading a protocol Demand Protocol Architecture (DPA)

Installation Guide for Clients

241

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Net Continue
Purpose The net continue command reactivates network connections suspended with the net pause command. Syntax net continue {drdr | prdr} where drdr
Continues a workstations connections to all shared directories.

prdr
Continues a workstations connections to all shared printer queues.

Comments You can abbreviate the net continue command as net cont. When you continue network connections using net continue, your workstation ignores its local connections to corresponding printers and drives when a network connection is assigned to the same port. See Also
For information about See Chapter 6, Using LAN Manager Basic

Pausing and continuing network connections Suspending connections to shared resources Connecting to shared resources

Net Pause Net Use

242

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Net Help
Purpose The net help command provides Help with a specic command and lists commands for which Help is available. Syntax net help [command] net [command] help where command
Is the command you need help with. Supported command names are net continue, net name, net pause, net print, net start, and net use. You can just type the action name, leaving off net. For example, for Help with the net print command, type net help print.

To display information about how to get Help, type net help. Comments For Help with a specic command, type net, the command name, and help, or type net help followed by the command name. (Do not repeat the word net as part of the command name.) Examples
To view a list of LAN Manager Basic commands that you can get Help with, type: net help To get information about the net use command, type: net help use - Or net use help

243

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

See Also
For information about See Chapter 6, Using LAN Manager Basic

Getting Help

244

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Net Name
Purpose The net name command displays the computername assigned to a workstation and assigns a computername to a workstation. Syntax net name [\\computername] where computername
Is the name assigned to a workstation or the name you want to assign to a workstation.

To display a workstation's computername, type net name. Comments The computername identies a workstation on the network and is a key for performing network tasks. When you connect your workstation to a shared resource, the server sharing the resource checks the computername to verify that you are allowed access. For this reason, a computername must be unique on the network. If you need to access shared resources that require a password, your computername must be the same as your username. You assign a computername when you start your workstation with the net start workstation command unless you try to assign a name that is already in use. In this case, the workstation starts without an assigned computername. If this occurs, use net name to assign a valid computername. If no computername displays when you type net name without options, the workstation started without a valid computername. See Also
For information about See Chapter 6, Using LAN Manager Basic Net Start Workstation

Computernames
Setting computernames

245

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Net Pause
Purpose The net pause command pauses connections to shared resources. Syntax net pause {drdr | prdr} where drdr
Pauses a workstations connections to all shared directories.

prdr
Pauses a workstations connections to all shared printer queues.

Comments Pausing a connection allows you to temporarily use a devicename for a device at your workstation that is already assigned to a shared resource. For example, you can connect the LPT1 devicename to a shared printer queue. If LPT1 is also assigned to a printer attached to your workstation, you can pause the network connection and print a le at your workstations printer. To send print jobs again to the shared printer queue with the devicename LPT1, reactivate the connection with the net continue command. See Also
For information about See Chapter 6, Using LAN Manager Basic Net Continue Net Use

Pausing and continuing network connections Continuing connections to shared resources

Connecting to shared resources

246

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Net Print
Purpose The net print command displays the contents of shared printer queues and prints a le. Syntax net print {\\computername[\sharename] | devicename} net print [lename] devicename where computername
Is the name of the server sharing the printer queue(s) with contents you want to display.

sharename
Is the name of a printer queue with contents you want to display.

devicename
Is the name of the device at your workstation you assign to the printer queue with contents you want to display. LPT1 through LPT3 are the devicenames available for printer queues.

lename
Is the name of a file you want to print.

Comments Specifying the computername of a server with the net print command displays the contents of its printer queues. You dont need to be connected to a server to view the contents of its printer queues. Specifying the devicename you assigned to a printer queue with the net print command displays the contents of that printer queue, allowing you to check the status of a print job you sent.

247

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Specifying either a computername or a devicename produces a display similar to the following:

Pos ID Size Date Time Name Status 001 268 115074 07-15-92 16:20 DANC Printing 002 269 65174 07-15-92 16:22 JOHNSW Waiting

This display shows the position, identication number, size (in bytes), date, time, owner, and status of each print job in the printer queue. The Name column lists the owner of each print job. When a job was sent from a LAN Manager Basic workstation, this column shows the computername. When a job was sent from a LAN Manager Enhanced or an OS/2 workstation, this column shows the username. Examples
To examine the contents of printer queues on the \\FINANCE server, type: net print \\finance To send the REPORTS.DOC file to the printer queue connected to your workstation's LPT1 devicename, type: net print reports.doc lpt1: To check the status of a print job that you sent to the printer queue connected to LPT1, type: net print lpt1:

See Also
For information about See Chapter 6, Using LAN Manager Basic Net Use

Printing over the network

Connecting to shared printer queues

248

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Net Start Workstation

Purpose The net start workstation command starts a workstation and sets its computername. Syntax net start workstation computername where computername
Is the name assigned to a workstation.

Comments You can abbreviate workstation as wksta, redirector, or rdr. When you type net start workstation computername, LAN Manager Basic software loads into your workstation's memory and the workstation starts. You will rarely, if ever, use this command. Usually, your administrator will set up your workstation so that the net start workstation command is in your AUTOEXEC.BAT le and LAN Manager Basic starts automatically. See Also
For information about See Chapter 6, Using LAN Manager Basic Net Name

Computernames Checking the computername

249

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Net Use
Purpose The net use command connects a workstation to or disconnects a workstation from a shared resource, or displays information about workstation connections. It also controls the persistent net connections feature. Syntax net use [devicename] [\\computername\sharename [password | *] net use {devicename | \\computername\sharename} /delete net use [devicename] [\\computername\sharename [password | *] net use /p[ersistent]:{yes | no | freeze | save} where devicename
Assigns a name to a device connected to a shared resource or specifies the disconnecting devicename. LAN Manager Enhanced uses two kinds of devicenames, one type for disk drives (all nonlocal drive letters through the value of LAST DRIVE as defined in the CONFIG.SYS file) and the other type for printers (LPT1 through LPT3).

computername
Is the name of a server sharing a resource. If the computername contains blank characters, enclose the double backslash (\\) and the computername in quotation marks (" ").

sharename
Is the name of a resource.

password
Is the password needed to use a resource. To be prompted for the password, type an asterisk (*) instead of the password. A password does not appear when you type it at a password prompt.

/delete
Cancels a network connection.

250

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

/p[ersistent]
Controls the use of persistent network connections. This switch is used alone; it cannot be combined with any other switch, nor can it be used while adding or removing a connection. The default is yes. yes Saves all connections as they are made and restores them at next logon. no Neither saves nor restores connections at the next logon. freeze Stops saving connections but does not overwrite the existing list of connections. save Saves your current connections, over writing any previously saved connections. These settings will be restored each time you log on. Connections made after using the net use /o: save command are neither save nor restored.

To list a workstations connections, type net use without options. Comments By connecting a workstation to a shared resource, you can use the resource as if it were attached to the workstation. For example, net use can connect your workstation to a shared printer queue that uses a high-quality printer. When you use a program such as Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, you can print les on that printer by directing print jobs to the devicename for the queue that uses the printer. You can use a shared resource without making a connection with net use. The connection is made automatically by MS-DOS and some network programs when you specify the network path of the resource with a command. If the resource is protected by a password, you must establish access with net use. You dont have to assign a devicename to establish access. Just type net use, the network path of the resource, and the password.

251

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

You can use a shared directory without assigning a devicename to the connection. You do this at the MS-DOS prompt by using the network path with some commands and applications. For example, to use Microsoft Word to edit the LIST.DOC le in the shared directory with the network path \\SALES\FARWEST, type:
word \\sales\farwest\list.doc

Microsoft Word loads the shared le even though you havent made a previous connection to \\SALES\FARWEST. Note that this procedure doesnt work when you need a password to gain access to \\SALES\FARWEST. In this case, you must rst establish access to the directory. You cannot delete a connection to a shared directory if you use that directory as your current drive. You must change to another drive before you delete the connection.
NOTE: You can only make connections to sharenames of up to eight characters, optionally followed by an extension consisting of a period (.) and one to three characters. LAN Manager sends an error message if you try to connect to a longer sharename.

Viewing Your Workstations Connections When you type net use without options, you get information about your workstation's connections in a display similar to the following:
Status Local name Remote name OK M: \\FINANCE\SCRATCH DISCONNECTED G: \\PRODUCT\C ERROR LPT1: \\PRINT1\LASER

The status of a connection can be:

OK Active

Disconnected Paused
Error

Suspended by the server but will re-establish when you use it Paused by the workstation Ended and must be deleted

252

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Local name is the devicename assigned to the resource. Remote name is its network path. There are two ways to get information about a connection:
Type net use devicename. Type net use and the network path of the resource. You must type this command twice: first to establish a connection to the resource, and then to get information about it.

Either method produces a display similar to the following:

Local name Remote name Resource type Status #Opens #Connections LPT1: \\PRINT1\LASER Print OK 0 1

Resource type
Is the type of resource you are using (disk or printer).

#Opens
Is the number of files currently open in this connection.

#Connections
Is the number of connections the workstation has to the resource.

Examples
To assign the devicename E: to the LETTERS directory on the \\FINANCE server, type: net use e: \\finance\letters To assign the devicename LPT1 to the LASER2 printer queue on the \\ACCOUNT server, type: net use lpt1: \\account\laser2 To cancel your connection to the \\ACCOUNT\LASER2 printer queue connected to LPT1, type: net use lpt1: /delete

253

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

To establish access to the \\FINANCE servers SCRATCH shared directory, which requires the password meteor, type: net use \\finance\scratch meteor

To cancel your connection to the \\FINANCE\SCRATCH shared directory, type: net use \\finance\scratch /delete

To connect to a resource shared on the FINANCE 2 server, type: net use k: "\\finance 2"\memos You must use quotation marks with a servername that has a space. If you omit the quotation marks, LAN Manager will not accept a servername that includes a space.

See Also
For information about See Chapter 6, Using LAN Manager Basic

Making connections Pausing and continuing connections

Viewing connections

Net Pause, Net Continue

Net View

254

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Netrun
Purpose The netrun command runs a program or command on a LAN Manager OS/ 2 or UNIX system server.
NOTE: Netrun does not work on Windows NT Advanced Servers or workstations. You cannot use the netrun command to run interactive programs such as word processors or spreadsheets.

Syntax netrun command where command

Is the name of a program you want to run. The program file must have a .EXE extension. You dont need to supply the filename extension when you type the command.

Comments The netrun command lets you use another computers processing power to run a program. You may need the help of your administrator to use this command. To run a program on a server
1 2 3 Get the filename of the program you want to run and the computername of the server you want to use. Connect to a shared directory on the server with the net use command. Change your current directory to the shared directory. This directory need not contain the program you want to run; the administrator defines which programs you can run. Type netrun followed by the filename of the program and any options or variables the program requires.

If the program you are running has options or variables that include lenames, specify the full path for each le. If a drive letter is included in the path, LAN Manager assumes that the drive is one of the servers drives.

255

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Most programs produce some kind of output or data. When you use netrun, this output is sent to your screen. To send the output to a le, specify a >path to receive the output in the netrun command line. By default, LAN Manager creates this le in the current directory. If you specify a drive letter, netrun assumes the drive is one of the workstations drives. Because the Netrun service runs as a daemon process on the UNIX system server without a controlling terminal, and because any command executed by netrun inherits this state, those programs that issue input prompts when they detect that they are being run from the command line will not issue prompts. Commands that can be run with the netrun command are controlled by the Netrun service on the computer that has the executable le. For example, the shell detects whether there is a controlling terminal and issues the PS1 prompt while waiting for command input. It does not do this when input is not coming from a terminal (for example, when it is running a shell script from a le). When run from netrun, the shell will not issue any prompts. A sample session follows:
D:> netrun sh date Wed Sep 2 17:20:26 PDT 1992 who root console exit D:>

Aug 24 12:31

When using the netrun program on an MS-DOS client, the keyboard input is buffered, and lines are sent only when the buffer lls or a return is entered. This may require entering a return after some special characters to get them sent across. For example, when entering expressions to the UNIX system bc program, you might type the following:
D:> netrun bc 3+4 7

If you then intend to exit bc by typing CTRL+D (which would normally terminate bc immediately), you need to follow the CTRL+D with a carriage return to send the CTRL+D to the server.

256

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Example
Suppose you want to run a file-comparison program called DIFF.EXE on the \\ADMIN server with the LISTS shared directory. The two files you want to compare are MAILLIST.TXT and ADDRESS.LST, and the file you want to receive the output is NEWLIST.TXT on your drive C. To accomplish this comparison, assign a devicename (such as D:) to the LISTS directory on the \\ADMIN server. Change to that drive, and start the program using the netrun command. To do this, type the following: net use d: \\admin\lists d: netrun diff maillist.txt address.lst >c:\newlist.txt

See Also
For information about See Net Use

Connecting to a shared directory Viewing a list of shared directories on a server Other UNIX system commands

Net View Uchmod, Ud, Udir, Uren

257

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Nwload
Purpose The nwload utility starts NetWare Connectivity. Syntax nwload [username] where username
Is your NetWare username.

Comments NetWare Connectivity allows you to use Novell NetWare servers. You will be prompted for your NetWare username, unless you include it on the command line. You cannot use this utility while the Microsoft Windows operating system is running. Use this utility before you start the Windows operating system; or stop the Windows operating system, use the nwload utility, and then restart the Windows operating system. See Also
For information about See

Unloading NetWare Connectivity NetWare Connectivity

Nwunload Appendix B, Using NetWare Connectivity, and the NetWare Connectivity Guide

258

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Nwunload
Purpose The nwunload utility unloads NetWare Connectivity. Syntax nwunload Comments NetWare Connectivity allows you to use NetWare servers. After you unload NetWare Connectivity with the nwunload utility, you can start NetWare again with the nwload utility. You cannot use this utility while the Microsoft Windows operating system is running. Use this utility before you start the Windows operating system; or stop the Windows operating system, use the nwunload utility, and then restart the Windows operating system. See Also
For information about See

Loading NetWare Connectivity NetWare Connectivity

Nwload Appendix B, Using NetWare Connectivity, and the NetWare Connectivity Guide

259

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Ping
Purpose The ping utility lets you verify a physical connection to a remote computer. Syntax ping remote_computer [t [timeout_value]] [n [num_times]] where remote_computer
Is the computername or IP address of a remote computer.

-t [timeout_value]
Is the number of seconds (timeout_value) that this node waits for an ICMP echo reply from a remote computer. The timeout_value range is from 1 through 300 seconds; the default is 20.

-n [num_times]
Is the number of times ping sends an echo request to the remote computer. If you dont specify a number, ping uses the default of one echo request. NOTE: There is a 1-second delay between each echo request.

Comments The ping utility is a Microsoft TCP/IP utility that can be used to isolate network hardware problems and incompatible congurations for StarLAN 10 networks, token-ring networks, and ThinLAN networks.

260

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Printsta
Purpose The printsta command accepts print jobs from other workstations and prints them on a shared printer. Syntax printsta options
printsta /D

where options are: /N:name

Allows you to grant one remote workstation exclusive access to the LAN Manager Print Station printer. If you use this switch, the only remote user who can send print jobs to your printer is the one at the computer with computername name. (Of course, you will still be able to send print jobs to your own printer, too.)

/L:n
Tells LAN Manager Print Station which printer port to use. For example, /L:1 would instruct LAN Manger Print Station to use printer connected to LPT1. The range is 1 to 3; the default is 1.

/V:n
Redirects printer output from the workstation that is sharing a printer from the port that has the shared printer to the specified logical port, which may be in turn redirected to a queue on a server. You may specify 1 for LPT1, 2 for LPT2, or 3 for LPT3.

/Q
Acts as a toggle to pause and release the queue.

/M:n
Specifies the amount of cache memory reserved for each permitted spool file. When LAN Manager Print Station is loaded, it allocates a memory block (a buffer) for caching the spool le data for each spool le that it may receive over the network. You set the number of spool les that may be created at one time with the /F option. For example, if you set /F:10 and /M:200, when

261

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

LAN Manager Print Station loads, it will allocate 2000 bytes for the buffers that receive data that go into the spool les. In this case, when a print job arrives, LAN Manager Print Station will collect data until it has received 200 bytes; then it will write that data into the spool le, empty the buffer, and receive the next 200 bytes of data from that print job. At any one time, it may be doing this for each of the 10 spool les permitted. Increasing the size of these buffers reduces the amount of network trafc needed to print a le but also increases the amount of memory the LAN Manager Print Station needs. These buffers are allocated from MS-DOS and do not reside in the same place in memory as the print spooler. The size of these buffers should be reduced if memory constraints are a problem. The range is 128 bytes to 4096 bytes; the default is 128 bytes.

/T:n
Sets the priority of LAN Manager Print Station on the host computer. That is, it establishes how successfully LAN Manager Print Station can compete for processing time with other programs that the user of the host computer may be running, by controlling how often it can use the computers processing power. The highest priority is 1. Assigning a lower priority (by increasing this value) will force LAN Manager Print Station to wait longer periods of time in between doing any processing. If using LAN Manager Print Station seems to slow the use of other applications on the workstation, increase this value. If fast print spooling is more important, then assign a higher priority (decrease the value) to give LAN Manager Print Station more processing time. For example, the default value of 10 instructs LAN Manager Print Station to process approximately twice every second. The range is 1 to 255, with 1 being the highest priority. The default is 10.

/I:n
Each time the printsta utility gains control of the computers processing power, it will use n cycles for processing before it relinquishes control again. The range is 1 to 255, the default is 1.

/O:n
Specifies the number of characters to be printed in each pass. The range is 1 to n characters, where n is the value specified with the /M switch. The default is 32.

/A:n
Causes LAN Manager Print Station to disconnect remote clients that have not spooled to the printer in the number of minutes specified.

262

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

The range is 0 (never auto-disconnect) to 1440 minutes; the default is 1 minute.

/R:n
If LAN Manager is loaded in spooling mode, this option (retry) specifies the number of seconds to wait between printer status checks. If the printer is slow, this value should be increased. If LAN Manager Print Station is loaded in nonspooling mode, this option (retry) instructs the spooler to wait for the specied number of seconds before failing the print request. Since the nonspooling mode does not maintain a queue, print jobs that run into a printer error are held until either the error clears or the retry time (n seconds) passes. After n seconds, the print job will fail. After the printer error is determined and corrected, the remote user can send the print job again. It is recommended that /R be set to a small value for the nonspooling mode, since the remote users computer cannot continue any processing until it receives a response to its network print request. The range is 1 to 255 seconds; the default is 5.

/B:n
Configures the maximum number of network buffers that LAN Manager Print Station allocates when it is loaded into memory. Network buffers are used to build network packets for sending data across the network. Each network buffer uses 128 bytes of memory. When there are more network buffers, more information can be sent in each packet, and spool files encounter less competition for the buffer. This can dramatically affect network performance, so low numbers of network buffers should be avoided. The range is 1 to 20 buffers; the default is 5.

/C:n
Specifies the maximum number of remote sessions that can be active at once, that is, the number of net use connections users can establish with the host workstation to use LAN Manager Print Station. Each session takes only 24 bytes of memory. The range is 1 to 20 sessions; the default is 5.

/E
Enables the host workstation to send messages from the printer to the remote user who has sent the print job. The default is for the host workstation not to send these messages.

263

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

/F:n
Specifies the maximum number of spool files that can be open on the host workstation at once. There is no constraint on how many of these spool files a single remote session can have open. Spool le structures are allocated when LAN Manager Print Station is loaded and take up 64 bytes of memory each. Since one cache block is allocated per spool le, the total memory used for each spool le is actually 64 bytes + the size of the cache block. The size of the cache block is set with the /M option. If possible there should be at least one network buffer allocated for every spool le. Network buffers are set with the /B option. The range for /F is 1 to 10 spool les; the default is 5. To load LAN Manager Print Station in nonspooling mode, set /F:0 (spool les equal to zero).

/K:jobid
Deletes the print job specified by jobid. To obtain the jobid number, either view the queue through Print Manager (if you are using the Windows operating system) or use the command: net print \\hostcomputername\lpt The jobid will appear on the line for the print job you want to delete.

/P:password
Protects the printer share with a password. Only users who know the password will be able to connect to the workstation to use LAN Manager Print Station. The password may be up to 15 characters long.

/S
Enables separator pages. One extra page, with the remote users name, will be printed per print job.

/W:directory
Specifies the working directory where LAN Manager Print Station will keep its spool files. If no option is specified, the directory that was current when LAN Manager Print Station was loaded will be used. By specifying a working directory, you can prevent the user at the host workstation from being distracted or annoyed by the appearance of temporary files in a directory that is reserved for other work.

264

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Generally, you should not delete spool les from the working directory, as doing so could disrupt a remote print job. All spool les are deleted at the end of the print job. This option does not affect LAN Manager Print Station in the nonspooling mode.

/D
Removes LAN Manager Print Station from memory. This option cannot be used with any other options. This will free all memory reserved for caching spool les, as well as freeing the memory used for the program itself. It will cancel any jobs that have not completed and will remove the computername from the networks list of available servers. You can restart LAN Manager Print Station any time after you have successfully removed the program from memory. In some instances, other applications may hook the interrupts that LAN Manager Print Station chained when the program was started. If this happens, the printsta /D command will be unable to unhook those interrupts, and will continue to use a small amount of memory to handle them. In this case, you will not be able to restart LAN Manager Print Station until you have rebooted your computer.

Comments The workstation running LAN Manager Print Station must be running MS-DOS version 3.3 or later and LAN Manager 2.1a or later. LAN Manager Print Station uses only conventional memory. The default conguration uses just over 6K of memory. If you allow more than the default number of spooled les, network buffers, and/or remote connections, or if you increase the cache size, the memory requirements can be as much as 51.4K. If you use the minimal conguration with the spooler enabled, you can reduce the memory requirements to 5.4K. For low-memory congurations, you can disable the spooler, lowering the memory requirements to 5.0K. If disk space is not available for temporary les, it is a good idea to disable the spooler. However, if the spooler is disabled, users who send print jobs to this printer will be unable to use their workstations until their print job is done. LAN Manager Print Station can only be reached via the rst protocol on the workstation sharing the printer. Usually, this is the rst protocol listed in that workstations PROTOCOL.INI le. However, the order of protocols can be
265

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

changed with the wrknets keyword in the [workstation] section of the LANMAN.INI le. The protocol need not be the rst protocol on the remote workstation that is sending the job. For example, if NetBEUI is the rst protocol on the workstation sharing the printer, workstations sending jobs must use NetBEUI as one of their protocols. The workstation sending a print job must establish a network connection to the LAN Manager Print Station host workstation. MS-DOS workstations must be running LAN Manager 2.0 or later; OS/2 workstations must be running LAN Manager 2.1a or later. Loading LAN Manager Print Station on the Hoappears.st Workstation To allow other users to send print jobs to your printer, you must load LAN Manager Print Station as a terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) program, using the printsta command. If necessary, you can also unload the program. LAN Manager Print Station must be loaded prior to the Windows operating system. If you are using the AUTOEXEC.BAT le to load Print Station and to start the Windows operating system, be sure the line to load Print Station comes before the line that starts the Windows operating system but after the line that starts the Workstation service. To load LAN Manager Print Station
Type printsta [options], where options are those listed in this command reference.

To unload LAN Manager Print Station

Type printsta /d.

For details, see the description of the /D option. To Use LAN Manager Print Station from a Remote Workstation You can connect to a LAN Manager Print Station printer as you would to any other printer, using the computername as the servername and LPT as the sharename. For example, to connect to the printer on the workstation \\WILDWOOD, you would connect one of your logical LPT ports to \\WILDWOOD\LPT.

266

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Examples
To start Print Station with spooling disabled, type: printsta /f:0 To start Print Station, giving remote print jobs minimal priority for processing time, type: printsta /t:255 To start Print Station, allowing up to five spool files and five buffers, with 500 bytes of cache memory per spool file (2.5K bytes of cache memory will be allocated), type: printsta /f:5 b:5 /m:500

See Also
For information about See

Using printsta Other print spoolers

Chapter 3, Using Shared Printers Clispool, Clipcach

267

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Prtsc
Purpose The prtsc utility is a terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) program used to ush the print spooler when an application has failed to send an end-of-job signal. Syntax prtsc Comments This loads the utility into memory. To ush the spooler, press CTRL+ALT+PRINT SCREEN. The prtsc utility is used to explicitly ush the spooler. Most applications send a signal that is recognized by the spooler as an end-of-job signal.

268

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Uchmod
Purpose The uchmod command allows you to change the UNIX system access permissions of a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems le or directory. This command is only available when you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. Syntax uchmod [who] {{+ | - | = } permission } pathname uchmod user#group#other# pathname where who
Represents the UNIX system user classification for which access permissions are changed. Replace who with u (user), g (group), o (others), or a (all classifications). When the who option is not specified, all user classifications are changed.

+
Adds the specified access permissions to the specified file or directory.

Removes the specified access permissions from the specified file or directory.

=
Sets access permissions to the groups or access permissions specified in the permissions option.

permissions
Represents the access permissions you want to assign to or remove from the directory or file. Replace permissions with any or all of the following: r (read), w (write), x (execute), l (lockable), s (set ID for user or group), or t (hold text file in swap space).

pathname
Represents the name of the file or directory to be affected. You can use wildcard characters.

269

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

user#
Represents the access permission value for the owner of the file or directory. Replace user# with the sum of any combination of the following values: 4 (for read), 2 (for write), 1 (for execute).

group#
Represents the access permission value for the group. Replace group# with the sum of any combination of the following values: 4 (for read), 2 (for write), 1 (for execute).

other#
Represents the access permission value for other users. Replace other# with the sum of any combination of the following values: 4 (for read), 2 (for write), 1 (for execute).

Comments To access the uchmod command, rst link to the DOSUTIL shared directory on LAN Manager for UNIX Systems servers. For example, type:
net use d: \\server1.serve\dosutil

Examples
You want to change the group (g) and other (o) access permissions of the file example to read-only. The UNIX system access permissions, for example, are currently read, write, and execute for user, group, and other (rwxrwxrwx). Type: uchmod go-wx example This changes the access permissions to rwxr--r--. You want to change the user (u) access permissions of the file two to read and execute. The UNIX system access permissions for two are currently read-only for user, group, and other (--x--x--x). Type: uchmod u+r two This changes the access permissions to r-x--x--x. You want to change the other (o) access permissions of the file list to execute only. The UNIX system access permissions for list are currently read-only for user, group, and other (r--r--r--). Type: uchmod o=x list

270

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

This changes the access permissions to r--r----x. You want to change the access permissions of all user classifications for the file milton to read-only, using numbers instead of letters. The UNIX system access permissions for milton are currently 644 (rw-r--r--). Type: uchmod 444 milton This changes the access permissions to r--r--r--.

See Also
For information about See

Using the uchmod command

Appendix C, Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Ud, Udir, Uren
Netrun

Other UNIX system commands

Executing UNIX system commands

271

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Ud
Purpose The ud command converts a UNIX system text le to MS-DOS format, or an MS-DOS le to UNIX system format. This command is only available when you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. Syntax ud [{-d | -u } -z ] le1 [le2] where -d
Converts the file to MS-DOS format. If the file is already in MS-DOS format, it is copied to the second file.

-u
Converts the file to UNIX system format. If the file is already in UNIX system format, it is copied to the second file.

-z
Prevents ^Z from being appended to the end of a file converted from UNIX system format to MS-DOS format, or ignores ^Z characters in a file being converted from MS-DOS format to UNIX system format.

le1
Represents the name of the file you want to convert. This file remains unchanged after the command is executed.

le2
Represents the name you want to assign to the converted version of the file.

Comments To access the ud command, rst link to the DOSUTIL shared directory on a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server. For example, type:
net use d: \\server1.serve\dosutil

272

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

When entered without the -d or -u parameter, ud converts a MS-DOS le to UNIX system format or a UNIX system le to MS-DOS format. If you do not redirect the output to a second le, the le is converted, and its text is displayed on your screen. You can also use a pipe ( | ) to send a reformatted le to a program. Examples
To convert a UNIX system file named text.unx to MS-DOS format, and place the output in a file named text.dos, type: ud -d text.unx text.dos To convert a UNIX system file named unixtext to OS/2 format, then sort the file and place the output in a file named text.srt, type: ud -d unitext | sort > text.srt

See Also
For information about See

Using the ud command

Appendix C, Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Uchmod, Udir, Uren
Netrun

Other UNIX system commands

Executing UNIX system commands

273

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Udir
Purpose The udir command lists les and directories, including those not displayed by the MS-DOS dir command, and displays the UNIX system access permissions. This command is only available when you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. Syntax udir [ -n | -t | -u | -r | -d ] [pathname] where -n
Lists file and directory names only.

-t
Lists the newest files first.

-u
Lists files on the server that are not available to the MS-DOS or OS/2 system.

-r
Displays the files in reverse alphabetical or chronological order.

-d
Displays the directory parameter only.

pathname
Represents the name of the directory and file to be listed. You can use a wildcard character with the filename.

Comments To access the udir command, rst link to the DOSUTIL shared directory on a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server. For example, type:
net use d: \\server1.serve\dosutil

274

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

If a UNIX system lename contains characters that are invalid in MS-DOS or is longer than the MS-DOS limit, you can use udir to list the le. If the specied resource is on a server running the UNIX operating system, udir displays information in a format like that displayed by the UNIX system ls l command. If the specied resource is on a computer running the MS-DOS or OS/2 operating system, udir displays information in a format like that displayed by the MS-DOS dir command.
NOTE: Filenaming conventions are based on the MS-DOS filenaming conventions (FAT).

Examples
You want to list the contents of the current directory on your local drive C. Type: udir The following appears:
C:\udir Volume in drive C: is DOS401 Directory of C:\. autoexec.bat rw--a 145 6-08-92 config.sys rw--a 344 6-08-92 landoc rw--a <DIR> 8-10-92 dos3_2 rw--<DIR> 6-10-92 ibmdos.com r-hsa 28009 9-12-92 report1.dft rw--a 8128 8-02-92 report2.dft rw--a 9012 8-16-92 res.scr rw--a 2045 8-08-92 tmp rw--a 23606 11-01-92 9 Files 26.78 Megabytes free

10:05a 9:30a 7:30a 11:08a 3:45p 5:30p 9:30a 8:30p

You want to list the contents of the shared directory linked to drive ID F. Type: udir f: The following appears:

C: udir f: Status: RO Volume in drive F: is CARPET_SERV Directory of f:/* UNIX-based server 'CARPET.SERVE' in share area 'VACUUM' DOS Name Owner Group Modes UNIX Name . <DIR> 10-28-92 4:45p lanman DOS---- rwxrwxr-x . . . <DIR> 10-22-92 8:51a root root rwxrwxrwx .. 65 10-28-92 4:39p root other rw-r--r-- name_too_long NET.DIR <DIR> 10-24-92 9:13a glenn DOS---- rwxrwxr-x net.dir OK_FOR.DOS 232 10-28-92 1:51p glenn DOS-a-- rw-rwlr-- ok_for.dos ROOTFILE 642950 10-25-92 2:19p root other rw-r--r-- rootfile 6 Files 150.72 Megabytes free

275

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

See Also
For information about See

Using the udir command

Appendix C, Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Uchmod, Ud, Uren
Netrun

Other UNIX system commands

Executing UNIX system commands

276

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Unload
Purpose The unload utility unloads a specied protocol from a workstation with Demand Protocol Architecture (DPA). Syntax unload protocol where protocol
Is the name of the last protocol loaded. Information regarding protocols is placed in the PROTOCOL.INI file and in LANMAN.DOS\DRIVERS\PROTOCOL directory by the Setup program. You should not edit these files.

Comments Protocols must be unloaded in the reverse of the order in which they were loaded (last in is rst out). To get information on what protocols are loaded, and in what order, type:
load /i

Do not use the unload utility while running the Microsoft Windows operating system. Either unload the protocol before running the Windows operating system, or stop the Windows operating system, unload the protocol, and then restart the Windows operating system. See Also
For information about See

Loading a protocol

Load

277

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Uren
Purpose The uren command renames or moves les on a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server running the UNIX operating system. This command is only available when you have a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server on your network. Syntax uren oldlename newlename uren lename1 [lename2... ] directoryname where oldlename
Is the original filename.

newlename
Is the new filename.

lename1
Is the name of the file you want to move.

lename2...
Is any additional files that you want to move.

directoryname
Is the name of the destination directory.

Comments To access the uren command, rst link to the DOSUTIL shared directory on a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server. For example, type:
net use d: \\server1.serve\dosutil

You cannot use the uren command to move a le from one drive to another. In addition, you cannot use the wildcard character * with the uren command.

278

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

Examples
You want to rename TOOBIGFORDOS to OKFORDOS. Type uren toobigfordos okfordos You want to move files ABC and DEF to the DIR1 directory. Type uren abc def dir1

See Also
For information about See

Using the uren command

Appendix C, Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Uchmod, Ud, Udir
Netrun

Other UNIX system commands

Executing UNIX system commands

279

Basic Reference Using UNIX System Commands

280

Country Codes
A country code in a user account denes the language the system uses to send messages (such as print notications and alerts) from a server to a users workstation. The country code does not affect the language of error and explanation messages that the workstation itself generates.
281

Country Codes

The following table lists available country codes. The default value for a country code is 0. When the default value is specied, messages are sent in the language used in the LANMAN.DOS\NETPROG\NET.MSG le.
Country Asia Australia Belgium Canada Denmark Finland France Germany Italy Japan Code 099 061 032 002 045 358 033 049 039 081 Country Latin America The Netherlands Norway Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom United States Code 003 031 047 351 034 046 041 044 001

The language you select will appear only if the appropriate international version of LAN Manager is loaded on your server. International versions of LAN Manager may be purchased separately.

282

Using NetWare Connectivity

283

Using NetWare Connectivity

With NetWare Connectivity, your workstation can run both LAN Manager and Novell NetWare; your computer can function as a workstation on a LAN Manager or Windows NT network and a NetWare network at the same time. You can easily access directories, les, and printers on all three types of servers. This appendix explains actions and situations specic to running LAN Manager, Windows NT, and NetWare Connectivity. It does not explain a NetWare network. For more information about using NetWare, see your NetWare manual(s). For information on maintaining connectivity, see the NetWare Connectivity Guide.

284

Using NetWare Connectivity How NetWare Connectivity Works

How NetWare Connectivity Works

If your workstation has NetWare Connectivity, your companys network has some NetWare servers as well as LAN Manager servers or Windows NT computers. Because your workstation has NetWare Connectivity, you can use directories, les, and printers on all these resources. For example, the database les you work with may be on a LAN Manager server, and the printer you use may be on a NetWare server. Or you may run one application from a NetWare server, while you run other applications using les on a Windows NT Advanced Server. Your network administrator will tell you exactly which directories, les, and printers are on Windows NT computers, LAN Manager servers, or NetWare servers.

285

Using NetWare Connectivity Starting and Stopping LAN Manager and NetWare

Starting and Stopping LAN Manager and NetWare

Your administrator has probably set up your computer in the following way:
LAN Manager starts automatically when the computer is turned on, and you dont ever need to stop it. NetWare does not start automatically. When you need to use NetWare, you start it by typing nwload. When you are done, you stop it by typing nwunload. (Be sure that Microsoft Windows is not running.)

Your network administrator might have set up your computer differently. Contact your administrator to nd out exactly how you are to start and stop LAN Manager and NetWare. If you need to start and stop LAN Manager and NetWare yourself, use the following commands.
NOTE: Do not use nwload or nwunload while the Microsoft Windows operating system is running. If you use the Windows operating system, you must start NetWare before starting the Windows operating system and stop the Windows operating system before stopping NetWare.

To start LAN Manager

Type net start workstation.

To stop LAN Manager

Type net stop workstation.

To start NetWare
Type nwload [username], where username is your NetWare username. The following example shows how you can specify your NetWare username with the nwload command:
nwload terryn

This username will be used to log you on to a NetWare server. If you dont specify your username when you type nwload, you will be prompted for it.

To stop NetWare
Type nwunload.

286

Using NetWare Connectivity Working with NetWare Connectivity

Working with NetWare Connectivity

When both LAN Manager and NetWare are running, you can use both LAN Manager and NetWare commands and utilities, and you can make connections to directories and printers on Windows NT computers, and LAN Manager and NetWare servers. If you use Microsoft Windows version 3.0 or later, you can use the Windows network capabilities to make using the network easier. You can use the Windows File Manager, Print Manager, and other network-oriented dialog boxes with both LAN Manager and NetWare. If you use command-line commands, you can alternate between LAN Manager commands and NetWare commands, if you want.

Using Microsoft Windows with NetWare Connectivity

When you use the Windows operating system to access the network, you can connect to Windows NT computers, LAN Manager servers, and NetWare servers with ease. You can use File Manager to display your connections to directories on all three types of servers, and also to make new connections. Similarly, you can use Print Manager and Printers from the Control Panel to view your connections to printers on all three types of servers and to make new connections. For more information about using the Windows operating system with your network, see your Microsoft Windows manual(s) and the Users Guide for Microsoft Windows Clients. When using the Windows operating system to perform certain actions, you may see a dialog box that asks you which network you want to use. When you see this dialog box, simply specify the network on which you want to perform the action. This dialog box appears only when you browse the network using either the File Manager or Printers from the Control Panel, and when you choose Network from the Control Panel. For all other network-related activities with the Windows operating system, you wont need to specify which network you are using; NetWare Connectivity determines it automatically.

287

Using NetWare Connectivity Working with NetWare Connectivity

Enabling NetWare Broadcast Messaging

With NetWare Connectivity and the Microsoft Windows operating system, you may need to manually enable messaging if you want to receive NetWare broadcast messages while using the Windows operating system. To enable broadcast messaging
1 2 3 4 Open the Windows Control Panel. Several icons appear. Choose the Network icon. In the resulting dialog box, choose NetWare. In the NetWare Utilities dialog box, press the down arrow key until Enable Broadcast Messages appears in the list box, and then choose the OK button.

Messages are now enabled.

Using NetWare Connectivity from the Command Line

If you dont use the Windows operating system, or if you type network commands from an MS-DOS box in the Windows operating system, you can use both LAN Manager and NetWare commands. You use LAN Manager commands when you work with directories and printers on Windows NT computers and LAN Manager servers, and NetWare commands when you work with directories and printers on NetWare servers. When you use NetWare Connectivity with typed commands, you must be aware of the situations described in the following sections, Connecting to Network Directories, and Connecting to Network Printer Queues. The information in these sections also applies when you use the LAN Manager screen (started with the net command) or NetWare menu utilities such as syscon and ler. If you are experienced with either LAN Manager or NetWare but are using the other network for the rst time, you may nd it helpful to learn the commands of the new network by referring to the table of commands in Using NetWare, Windows NT Advanced Server, and LAN Manager Commands, later in this appendix. You can also nd information about equivalent NetWare and LAN Manager commands by typing net help netware. You will see a list of common NetWare commands and their LAN Manager equivalents.

288

Using NetWare Connectivity Working with NetWare Connectivity

Connecting to Network Directories

Because LAN Manager, Windows NT, and NetWare share the drive letters that can be assigned to network directories, be careful when you assign drive letters to network directories. It is a good idea to use only drive letters from D to P for Windows NT and LAN Manager directories, and drive letters from Q to Z for NetWare directories.
NOTE: Usually, the last drive letter you should assign to LAN Manager or Windows NT directories is P, but your network administrator may have set up your workstation differently. Your administrator can tell you which letters to assign to which networks.

If you try to assign a wrong drive letter to a network directory, you will see an error message. If you use the LAN Manager net use command to try to assign a drive letter that is too close to Z as a Windows NT or LAN Manager directory, you will see this message:
DOS Error 15 has occurred. SYS0015: The system cannot find the drive specified.

If you use the NetWare map command to try to assign a drive letter too close to A as a NetWare directory, you will see this message:
Drive X is in use by a local drive.Do you want to assign it as network drive? (Y/N) Y

If you see this message, press n. Pressing n prevents you from assigning a single drive to two directories simultaneously. If you do assign a single drive letter to both a Windows NT or LAN Manager directory and a NetWare directory, you will be unable to access the Windows NT or LAN Manager directory. When you use that drive letter in a command, it will always refer to the NetWare directory. If you nd that you have a drive letter assigned to a Windows NT or LAN Manager directory and to a NetWare directory, cancel the connection to one of the directories. You can then reconnect to that directory using a different drive letter. For example, suppose you have the G drive assigned to both a LAN Manager directory and a NetWare directory (the PUBLIC directory on the NETWARE1 server). You can delete the connection to the NetWare directory by typing:
289

Using NetWare Connectivity Working with NetWare Connectivity

map del g:

You can then reconnect using a different drive letter, such as V, by typing:
map v: = netware1/sys:/public

Note that on LAN Manager Enhanced workstations, when you use a LAN Manager command to view the drive letters on your workstation that are assigned to network directories, only drive letters assigned to Windows NT and LAN Manager directories appear. Similarly, when you use a NetWare command to do this, only NetWare directories appear. For example, suppose you have assigned drive F to a Windows NT Advanced Server directory, and assigned drives Q and Z to NetWare directories. If you type net use (the LAN Manager command to view directories your workstation has connections to), only F appears. If you type map (the NetWare equivalent), only drives Q and Z appear.
Connecting to Network Printer Queues

LAN Manager, Windows NT, and NetWare must share the printer devicenames (such as LPT1 and LPT2) available on your workstation. Do not assign a single printer devicename to printer queues or more than one network at the same time. If you do, you can use only the LAN Manager queue referred to by that devicename. The LAN Manager command that lists devicenames assigned to network printers (net use) shows only Windows NT and LAN Manager printer queues. The NetWare command (capture) shows only NetWare printer queues. When you need to connect to a new printer, rst check your current connections to both types of queues, and then use a devicename not already in use. For example, suppose you need to connect to the printer queue LASER2 on the server PRODUCT. First, check your current connections with the net use and capture commands. Typing the LAN Manager command net use displays:
Status Local name Remote name -------------------------------------------------------OK LPT2 \\LMSERVER\PRINTER

290

Using NetWare Connectivity Working with NetWare Connectivity

Typing the NetWare command capture displays:

Device LPT1: re-routed to queue QUEUE_1 on server NWSERVER

Now that you see that the LPT1 and LPT2 devicenames on your workstation are already being used, you should assign LPT3 to the new printer queue.
NOTE: Be cautious before you assign LPT1 to a Windows NT or LAN Manager printer queue. On most NetWare networks, when you log on to a NetWare server, the LPT1 devicename is automatically assigned to a NetWare printer queue. If you assign LPT1 to a Windows NT or LAN Manager printer queue, you will be unable to access the NetWare printer queue.

If you have assigned a devicename to both a Windows NT or LAN Manager printer queue and a NetWare printer queue, cancel the connection to one of the printer queues, and then connect to that printer queue using another devicename. For example, if you nd that LPT1 is assigned to a LAN Manager printer queue (the LASER printer queue on the SALES server) and to a NetWare printer queue, cancel the connection to the LAN Manager printer queue by typing:
net use lpt1 /d

You can then reconnect to that printer queue using a different devicename, such as LPT2:
net use lpt2 \\sales\laser Using NetWare, Windows NT Advanced Server, and LAN Manager Commands

With NetWare Connectivity, when both NetWare and LAN Manager are running, you can easily use LAN Manager commands and NetWare commands. When you type a LAN Manager command, a Windows NT computer or LAN Manager server processes it; when you type a NetWare command, NetWare processes it. The following table shows equivalent commands in NetWare and LAN Manager. If you are an experienced NetWare user new to LAN Manager (or vice versa), use this table to nd the correct commands. You can also see this table onscreen by typing net help netware at a computer that has LAN Manager and NetWare Connectivity.

291

Using NetWare Connectivity Working with NetWare Connectivity

NetWare command attach

LAN Manager command none

Explanation and example Establishes a link between your workstation and a server, so that you can connect to that servers resources. In LAN Manager, this is not necessary because you can connect to a resource without rst attaching to the server. Connects to a network printer.
capture l=2 s=product q=laser1 net use lpt2 \\product\laser1

capture

net use lptx

endcap

net use lptx /d

Ends a connection to a network printer.

endcap l=2 net use lpt2 /d

help

net help

Displays Help information.

help net help

login

net logon

Logs you on to the network. With NetWare, you usually must be switched to a network drive (such as Q) to log in; with LAN Manager, you can log on from the C drive.
login net logon

logout

net logoff

Logs you off from the network.

logout net logoff

map

net use x:

Connects to a network directory.

map h: = product/sys net use h: \\product\sys

map del

net use x: /d

Deletes a connection to a network directory.

map del h: net use h: /d

292

Using NetWare Connectivity Working with NetWare Connectivity

NetWare command ncopy

LAN Manager command net copy

Explanation and example Copies les from one location to another on a server, or from one network computer to another.
ncopy memo.doc sales/sys:word net copy memo.doc \\sales\sys\word

nprint

net use lptx: net copy

Prints a le on a network printer. With LAN Manager, you must rst use net use to connect to a printer (if you arent already connected), and then use net copy to send the le to the printer.
nprint memo.txt s=product p=1 net use lpt2 \\product\laser1 net copy memo.txt lpt2

pstat (NetWare 2.x only)

net print

Displays information about printers attached to a server. LAN Managers net print command lists the jobs in each print queue; NetWares pstat command does not.
pstat s=product net print \\product

send

net send

Sends a message to another user. With Windows NT and LAN Manager, the message can usually have as many as 256 characters (depending on the value of sizmessbuf in the LANMAN.INI le). With NetWare, the message is limited to 45 characters.
send "Meeting canceled" terryn net send terryn Meeting canceled

setpass

net password

Changes your password.

setpass net password

293

Using NetWare Connectivity Working with NetWare Connectivity

NetWare command slist

LAN Manager command net view

Explanation and example Lists the servers on the network. With LAN Manager, it lists only the servers in your Windows NT Advanced Server or LAN Manager workstation domains (and the additional domains that your workstation is monitoring, if any). With NetWare, it lists all NetWare servers on the network.
slist net view

slist server

net view \\server

Checks if a specic server is active on the network. With Windows NT and LAN Manager, it also lists resources that the server shares; with NetWare, it does not list resources.
slist product net view \\product

systime

net time /set

Sets your workstations time to match the time of the specied server.
systime product net time \\product /set

294

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server

295

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Working with NetWare Connectivity

NOTE:

The information in this appendix applies to LAN Manager Basic and Enhanced workstations. Also (except for the last section Using the Kermit Terminal Emulator), this appendix is for users who are experienced with UNIX system commands.

This appendix contains information for using the UNIX operating system from your workstation, including the following:
Using special commands available on the LAN Manager server to work with files from the UNIX and MS-DOS operating systems Using the Kermit terminal emulator to log on to UNIX system host computers on your network or outside of your network

Some of your LAN Manager servers may run as an application on the UNIX operating system. The server computer may contain les that are accessible to UNIX system users but are not accessible to MS-DOS users at LAN Manager workstations. Conversely, les you create in the MS-DOS environment may not be accessible to UNIX system users. This could cause problems when you try to access certain les on the server, or when someone working in the UNIX system tries to access one of your shared les. This appendix contains information for making the les on your network accessible to users working in different environments. Some of the tools you will use to make les accessible are special commands available on the LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server. These commands enable you to do the following:
List and rename UNIX system files Convert your text files from MS-DOS format to UNIX system format and vice versa Change the UNIX system access permissions of files and subdirectories

To access these commands you must link to the shared directory DOSUTIL on a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server. Contact your administrator for further information. In addition, some of these special commands can be used to execute UNIX system commands on the server from your workstation. The following table lists the special commands and the sections in which they are described.

296

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Working with NetWare Connectivity

Command udir uren ud uchmod

Section Displaying Files Renaming UNIX System Files Converting Text Files Changing UNIX System Permissions for LAN Manager Files

For command reference pages for the special commands described in this appendix, see either Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference, or Chapter 7, Basic Reference.

297

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server FileNaming Conventions

FileNaming Conventions
Networks running LAN Manager software can include computers running different operating systems:
MS-DOS (client) Microsoft Windows (client) OS/2 (client or server) Macintosh (client) UNIX system (server) Windows NT (client or server)

These operating systems have different rules for the length of lenames and directory names and the characters that can be used in these names. Always follow the MS-DOS rules for le and directory names; valid MS-DOS names will always be accessible and visible to a user in any of the ve operating system environments. MS-DOS lenames and directory names can be up to eight characters long, plus an optional extension consisting of a period and up to three additional characters. Illegal characters for MS-DOS names include blank spaces and the special characters listed below: ",/ [] +=;:*?\|

298

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Displaying Files

Displaying Files
The following sections describe how to list server les from the MS-DOS and UNIX operating system environments.

Displaying Filenames in the MS-DOS Format

To display the contents of a directory on the server, in MS-DOS format, use the MS-DOS dir command from your client. In this display, all valid MS-DOS lenames appear in all uppercase letters. For example, the MS-DOS dir command displays the contents of a directory on a server named CARPET.SERVE as follows:
F: >dir Status: RO Volume in drive F is CARPET_SERV Directory of F: GROUPS 65535 10-01-92 4:14p NOTES 414 11-08-92 10:27a FILES 37 11-12-92 12:05p MEETINGS TXT 267 11-11-92 11:10a MEMBERS <DIR> 12-29-92 3:29p 5 file(s) 66253 bytes 142114816 bytes free

Filenames that appear in the MS-DOS system are displayed in standard MS-DOS format with the extension listed in a separate column.
NOTE: File or directory names that do not follow the MS-DOS format will not appear in the directory list, even if the files or directories exist on the drive. To display such files or directories, use the udir command, described in the next section.

Displaying Filenames in the UNIX System Format

The udir command enables you to display the contents of a directory on the server. The format of the display is similar to that displayed by the UNIX system ls -l command. The udir command is useful when you want to display les and directories that are valid to the UNIX system but invalid to

299

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Displaying Files

the MS-DOS system [including high-performance le system (HPFS)]x, or when you want to see the UNIX system access permissions and ownership of les and directories. To use the udir command, do the following
1 2 3 Link to the shared directory containing the udir command (usually \\server1.serve\DOSUTIL). Link to the shared directory whose contents you want to display. At the MS-DOS prompt, type udir pathname. Replace pathname with the full path of the directory whose contents you want to display. NOTE: Additional parameters are available with the udir command. For more information on the udir command, see Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference, or Chapter 7, Basic Reference.

The following is an example of a directory list in UNIX system format:

C:> udir h: Volume in drive H: is WRITEON Directory of h:/* UNIX-based server 'WRITEON.SERVE' DOS Name . <DIR> 12-18-91 6:56p . . <DIR> 01-05-92 8:08a 572 01-18-92 8:08p REPORT 21357 12-05-92 4:45p SPCH.D2 16686 12-05-92 9:06a DOC.1 <DIR> 12-18-92 2:47p 12333 12-19-92 1:07p 5 Files 3.15 Megabytes free

in share area 'DMD' Owner Group Modes UNIX Name aeb other rwxrwxr-x . dmd other rwxrwxr-- . . smb DOS-a-- rw-r--r-- .profile aeb other rw-rw-r-x report aeb other rwxrwxr-x spch.d2 dmd other rwxrwxr-x doc.1 gsc other rwxrwxr-x word.program

The following list describes each column on the screen:

MS-DOS file and directory names. The entry . is an abbreviation for the current directory. The entry .. is an abbreviation for the next higher level, or parent, directory. These abbreviations have the same meaning in the MS-DOS and UNIX operating systems. Only legal MS-DOS names will appear. The size of the file, in bytes. Directories are identified by:

300

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Displaying Files

<DIR> The date when the file or directory was most recently modified. The time when the file or directory was most recently modified. The UNIX system owner of the file or directory. The UNIX system group to which the file or directory belongs. UNIX system access permissions for the file or directory. UNIX system file and directory names. The file named WORD.PROGRAM appears under this UNIX system column only because this filename is invalid on the MS-DOS system. Filenames up to 1024 characters long can be displayed in this column.

Using the Udir Command on Local Client Drives

If you use the udir command to list a physical disk drive on your client (for example, drive A, B, or C if your client has a hard disk), it provides a display similar to that of the MS-DOS dir command. This display also includes an MS-DOS access permissions column similar to that displayed by the UNIX system ls -l command.
NOTE: When you enter the udir command, you can specify a single filename if you want to display one file only, or use the wildcard characters (* and ?) to display multiple filenames.

The following is a sample udir display of directories and les on a clients local hard disk:
C:> udir Directory of c: ansi.sys autoexec.bat config.sys landoc dos3_2 fouri.scr ibmdos.com lanman.scr report1.dft report2.dft old.scr list 12 Files rw--a rw--a rw--a rw--a rw--rw--a r-hsa rw--a rw--a rw--a rw--a rw--a 1651 145 344 <DIR> <DIR> 8007 28009 1054 8128 9012 2045 3206 5-09-92 11-08-92 11-08-92 9-10-92 10-10-92 10-04-92 9-12-92 11-24-92 9-02-92 10-06-92 8-08-92 11-08-92 11:05a 8:00a 9:30a 7:30a 11:08a 9:34a 3:45p 4:45p 5:30p 9:30a 8:30p 4:04p

19.13 Megabytes free

301

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Renaming UNIX System Files

Renaming UNIX System Files

The uren command enables you to rename a UNIX system le or directory. Specically, you can use it to change UNIX system lenames on the server that are invalid for the MS-DOS system to lenames that are valid for MS-DOS (see Filenaming Conventions, earlier in this appendix for requirements for valid MS-DOS lenames). This command is useful if you created a le while logged on as a UNIX system user (via terminal emulation), and now want to access that le from the MS-DOS prompt of LAN Manager. To rename a UNIX system le
1 At the MS-DOS prompt on a LAN Manager workstation, link to the shared directory on the server that contains the file to be renamed. (Instructions for linking to shared directories are provided in Chapter 2, Using Shared Directories.) Type the letter of the shared directory to which you are linked. Type uren name1 name2, where name1 is the current UNIX system filename and name2 is the new filename. (Make sure that the new filename complies with MS-DOS filename conventions.)

2 3

Using the Uren Command to Move Files

Because the uren command accepts full pathnames, you also can use it to move a le from one UNIX system directory to another. For example, to move the le BUDGET from the REPORT subdirectory to the MEMOS subdirectory, and to rename the moved le 1QBUDGET, enter the following command:
uren \report\budget\memos\1qbudget

The uren command also enables you to move one or more les to another directory by entering the command in the following format: uren name1 name2 ... directoryname Replace directoryname with the name of the destination directory.

302

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Renaming UNIX System Files

NOTE:

You cannot use the MS-DOS wildcard characters (* and ?) with the uren command. In addition, you cannot use the uren command to move a file from one drive to another.

For more information on the uren command, see Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference, or Chapter 7, Basic Reference.

303

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Handling Incompatible File Formats

Handling Incompatible File Formats

Different operating systems store les in different formats. For this reason, even if you can link to a shared directory that contains a le you want to use, you may not be able to open the le; or if you are able to open the le, it may be inappropriately formatted for your environment. For example, suppose the following le was created with a UNIX system text editor:
Dear Bob: This letter is in response to your inquiry of February 25. The information you requested is enclosed, along with other materials that should help you evaluate our product line.

If you look at this le with the MS-DOS type command, you would see the following:
Dear Bob: This letter is in response to your inquiry of February 25. T he information you requested is enclosed, along with other materials that should help you to evaluate our product line.

Similarly, if you had created the original le using an MS-DOS editor and listed it with the UNIX system cat -v command, you would see the following:
Dear Bob:^M ^M This letter is in response to your inquiry of February 25.^M The information you requested is enclosed, along with other^M materials that should help you evaluate our product line.^M ^Z

This is because, in the UNIX system, each line of text ends with a line-feed character. In the MS-DOS system, however, each line of text ends with a carriage-return character, followed by a line-feed character. If you need to convert text les from one operating system format to another, LAN Manager provides a conversion utility, the ud (UNIX to MS-DOS) command, which is described in the next section. The ud command can be used to translate a text le from MS-DOS format to the UNIX system format, or vice versa.

304

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Converting Text Files

Converting Text Files

This section describes how to convert text les from one operating system format to the other with the ud command, and how to pipe and redirect reformatted les. The UNIX system executable version of the ud command is stored in the /usr/bin directory, and the MS-DOS executable version is stored in the DOSUTIL shared directory on a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems server. In the UNIX system version, the command name and its parameters must be entered as all lowercase characters. In the MS-DOS version, the command name and parameters may be entered as either uppercase or lowercase characters.

Using the Ud Command

CAUTION: This command is intended only for text les. Do not use this command on executable or nontext data les.

The ud command converts a text le from one format to another format. To convert a text le
1 2 Link to the shared directory containing the ud command (usually \\server1.serve\\DOSUTIL). At the MS-DOS prompt, type: ud [option] filename1 > filename2 Replace option with one of the four options discussed in the next section, or leave it blank to convert MS-DOS to UNIX and vice versa. Replace lename1 with the name of the original le. Replace lename2 with the name for the new, converted le. The lenames must be different from each other.

For example, to convert a UNIX system le named UNIXTEXT to a le in MS-DOS format named SYSTEXT, type:
ud unixtext > systext

The ud command rewrites the le UNIXTEXT in MS-DOS format and puts it in a le named SYSTEXT. The original UNIXTEXT le remains unchanged.

305

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Converting Text Files

Guidelines for Using the Ud Command

When you are not sure of the format of a text le, use the ud command with the -d or -u option to convert the le to the format you need. If the le is already in that format, the command output (lename2) will be identical to the original le. If you do not enter a second lename, the le is converted, and its text is displayed on your screen. If you enter a second lename, be sure the lename is different from the rst lename. If the lename is the same, the contents of the le that you want to convert will be deleted.
Options

The ud command has the following options: -d

Converts a file to MS-DOS format.

-u
Converts a file to UNIX system format. NOTE: If you use either -d or -u for a file that is already in the specified conversion format, the command output (filename2) will be identical to the original file.

-z
affects the ^Z character. MS-DOS files often have ^Z as the last byte in the file. When converting a UNIX system file to MS-DOS format, the -z option does not put ^Z at the end of the file. When converting an MS-DOS file, the -z option forces ud to ignore any ^Z characters in the file. Without the -z option, the conversion stops when the first ^Z is encountered.

Piping and Redirecting Converted Files

You can use the pipe operator ( | ) with the ud command to send a reformatted le to a program. For example, to convert a le named UNIXTEXT from UNIX system format to MS-DOS format and display the converted le a screenful at a time, pipe the output of ud to the MS-DOS more utility by using the following command:

306

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Converting Text Files

ud -d f:unixtext | more

In this example, drive F is linked to the server directory, which contains the UNIXTEXT le, and the more utility is in your path. Piping is especially useful with MS-DOS commands, such as sort, which use a carriage return to determine where each line ends in the le. Because les in UNIX system format do not identify line ends by carriage returns, the les must be converted to MS-DOS format for the sort command to operate properly. You can then pipe the converted text to the sort command. For example, type:
ud -d unixtext | sort

This example displays the sorted text on your screen. To store the results in a new le called TEXT.SRT, you can use the redirection character ( > ) as follows:
ud -d unixtext | sort> text.srt

307

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Changing UNIX System Permissions for LAN Manager Files

Changing UNIX System Permissions for LAN Manager Files

Since LAN Manager for UNIX system servers run on the UNIX operating system, all LAN Manager les stored on the server are UNIX system les with UNIX system access permissions. The UNIX system access permissions on a LAN Manager le will always agree with the LAN Manager access permissions unless the UNIX system access permissions are explicitly changed. If UNIX system access permissions are modied, they can prevent access to a le or directory even if LAN Manager access permissions grant access to the resource. The uchmod command enables you to change UNIX system access permissions on a le to resolve access conicts. For more information on the uchmod command, see Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference, or Chapter 6, Basic Reference. Use the udir command to display the current UNIX system access permissions for a le.

308

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Using the Kermit Terminal Emulator

Using the Kermit Terminal Emulator

You can use terminal emulators on your client to log on to UNIX system computers on your network or outside of your network. Without leaving your client, you can log on to a host computer and perform all operational tasks as if you were sitting at that computer. Remember that logging on to a host computer is not the same as logging on to a server. When you are logged on to a host computer, your client functions like a computer terminal. Logging on to a host computer does not enable you to share directories or link to shared resources on the network. The following is a list of some of the terminal emulators you can use on the network:
Kermit Crosstalk XVI, Network Version RELAY Gold Network Version 4.0 Yale Terminal Emulator Program (YTERM) Version 4.0 Reflection 4: Version 3.3 TEworks /LAN

This section describes the procedures for using Kermit to log on to and off of a UNIX system host computer, and to transfer les between the host and your client. To transfer les, a host version of Kermit must be running on the host computer.

Logging on to a UNIX System Host from a Workstation

To log on to a UNIX system host computer with the Kermit terminal emulator
1 2 Start LAN Manager by issuing the net start workstation and net logon commands. Link to the DOSUTIL shared directory on a LAN Manager for UNIX System server with the net use command.

309

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Using the Kermit Terminal Emulator

To start the Kermit terminal emulator, at the client prompt type: x:kermit where x is the letter associated with the linked DOSUTIL directory. Kermit startup information is displayed and the Kermit prompt appears. The Kermit prompt looks like this: MS-Kermit>

At the Kermit prompt, type: set port net hostname Replace hostname with the name of the host computer to which you want to log on. If you are logging on to a server, replace hostname with the servername of the server without the .SERVE extension. For example, if the name of the server is yourserv.serve, type: set port net yourserv A message appears stating that your nodename is being checked.

At the Kermit prompt, type connect. The Kermit terminal emulator screen appears, followed by the login prompt of the computer to which you have connected.

6 NOTE:

Type your UNIX system login.

You cannot log on as root from a remote terminal. A password prompt appears. 7 Type your password. Information about the host computer appears. 8 Do one of the following: If the TERM= prompt appears, type one of the following: kermit VT320 VT102 VT100 VT52 - Or If the prompt does not appear, type: TERM=termtype; export TERM Replace termtype with one of the types listed above. The UNIX system prompt for the host system appears. 310

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Using the Kermit Terminal Emulator

You have now logged on and can work on the UNIX system.
NOTE: Because your client is emulating a terminal, some keys do not function as they normally do. For example, PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN are not transmitted to the UNIX system, but they do cause local scrolling of the Kermit screen.

Logging Off of a UNIX System Host

You can return to the workstation prompt by logging off of the UNIX system host, or by temporarily switching to MS-DOS from the UNIX system. To access MS-DOS temporarily, see the next section. To log out of a UNIX system host computer
Press CTRL+D to log out. The Kermit prompt, MS-Kermit>, appears. Type exit or quit. The MS-DOS prompt appears.

You have now logged out of the UNIX system host.

Temporarily Accessing the MS-DOS Prompt

You can move back and forth between the MS-DOS and UNIX systems without logging out of the UNIX system. To temporarily return to the MS-DOS prompt
Press CTRL+] and then press P. The MS-DOS prompt appears. You may now enter an MS-DOS command or use an MS-DOS application. To return to the UNIX system session, type exit at the MS-DOS prompt, and press ENTER then press SPACEBAR to continue.

Transferring Files
You can use the Kermit terminal emulator to transfer les from a UNIX system host computer to your workstation, and vice versa. The les sent to or received from your workstation can be on a hard disk or diskette on your

311

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Using the Kermit Terminal Emulator

workstation, or in a shared directory on a server to which your workstation is linked. The les sent to or received from the UNIX system can be in any UNIX system directory to which you have access. A UNIX system version of the Kermit command must be on the host computer.
NOTE: To transfer files, you need to execute part of the file transfer procedure on the Kermit program running on your client, and another part of the procedure on the Kermit program running on the host computer; you need to know on which system you are executing a command.

To transfer les using the Kermit terminal emulator

1 Start the Kermit terminal emulator on your workstation, and log on to the UNIX system host computer as described in Logging on to a UNIX System Host from a Workstation, earlier in this appendix. At the host UNIX system prompt, type kermit. The Kermit program is started on the host. The host Kermit prompt, C-Kermit>, appears. NOTE: Type commands on the host system in lowercase letters, as shown. Also, note the difference between the workstation Kermit prompt and the Kermit prompt on the host. The workstation Kermit prompt (MS-Kermit>) begins with the letters MS while the host Kermit prompt (C-Kermit>) begins with the letter C. 3 Do one of the following: To transfer text files, proceed to step 4. - Or To transfer binary files, type: set file type binary Proceed to Step 4. 4 Do one of the following: To send a file from the host computer to your workstation, type: send /pathname Replace pathname with the UNIX system path and the name of the le you want to transfer to your workstation. If the le is directly under your current directory on the UNIX system, and not in a subdirectory, you can type just the lename. 312

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Using the Kermit Terminal Emulator

Kermit displays the following message:

Escape back to your local system and give a RECEIVE command . . .

Proceed to step 5. To send a file from your workstation to the host computer, type: receive/pathname Replace pathname with the UNIX system path and the directory to which you want the le transferred and the name you want to assign to the le. If you want the le directly under your current directory on the UNIX system, and not in a subdirectory, you can type just the lename. Kermit displays the following message:
Escape back to your local system and give a SEND command . . .

Proceed to step 5. 5 Press CTRL+] and then press C. The workstation Kermit prompt, MS-Kermit>, reappears. Commands you enter at this prompt execute on your workstation system, not on the host system. 6 Do one of the following: If you are transferring a file from the host computer to your workstation, type receive pathname. Replace pathname with the drive and path on your workstation to which you want the le sent, and the name you want to assign to the le. Remember, the drive ID may be linked to a shared directory. If you are transferring a file from your workstation to the host computer, type send pathname. Replace pathname with the drive, the path to, and the name of the le on your workstation that you want to send to the host computer. Remember, the drive ID may be linked to a shared directory. The Kermit le transfer screen appears and displays information about the transfer as it occurs. After the le has been transferred, the workstation Kermit prompt, MS-Kermit>, appears. 7 Type connect.

313

Connecting to a LAN Manager for UNIX Systems Server Using the Kermit Terminal Emulator

Your workstation is reconnected to the UNIX system host. The host Kermit prompt, C-Kermit>, appears. 8 Do one of the following: To transfer another file, repeat steps 4 through 8. To exit Kermit on the UNIX system and return to the UNIX system prompt, type quit.

314

Troubleshooting
This appendix applies to both LAN Manager Enhanced and LAN Manager Basic. It describes how to:
Perform simple checks on your computer and the network in case a malfunction

315

Troubleshooting Using the Kermit Terminal Emulator

occurs while you are using the network. Troubleshoot a shared printer. (Refer to these instructions only if a shared printer is attached to your workstation.)

The procedures in this appendix assume that, at some point, your computer and, if applicable, the shared printer were functioning on the network.

316

Troubleshooting Isolating Problems

Isolating Problems
Problems at your computer may be caused by trouble with its network adapter or problems in the LAN Manager program loaded on your computer. Problems also may be caused by trouble with the network hardware (other than the network adapter). This section describes how to:
Determine if the trouble is in your computer or in the network hardware. Identify problems with your computers LAN Manager program or network adapter.

NOTE:

Unless you are authorized to do so, do not attempt to correct problems that are occurring at more than one computerproblems at more than one computer may indicate a server or network-wide problem. If you suspect that such a problem exists, notify your administrator.

Before You Try Anything Else...

Before you can identify and correct any problem, you need to know where to look for it. The following procedure describes how to isolate a problem in either your computer or on the network. To isolate a problem
1 Check your screen to see if the trouble generated an error message. If the trouble provided an error message, notify your administrator, reporting the error number and the text of the error message. Otherwise, proceed to step 2. If the trouble did not generate an error message, proceed to step 2.

Ask other network users if they are having similar problems at their computers, or try the operation at another computer. If your computer is the only one with the problem, the problem is probably with your computer, not the network. Proceed to the next section. If other computers are having a similar problem, the problem may be a network problem. Notify your administrator.

317

Troubleshooting Isolating Problems

Troubleshooting Your Computer

If you suspect your computer is the trouble source, perform the following procedure to identify the problem.
To identify a problem with your computer 1 Check the network wiring to your computers network adapter. If you are using Microsoft TCP/IP and connect to the server, you can use the ping command to check network server connection (For more information, see Chapter 5, Enhanced Reference, or Chapter 7, Basic Reference.) Refer to the installation manual packaged with the network adapter for instructions on how to connect the network wiring correctly. 2 Reboot your computer and load LAN Manager. 3 4 5 If the trouble no longer appears, you corrected the problem by rebooting. You do not need to proceed further. If the trouble still exists, proceed to step 3.

Edit your AUTOEXEC.BAT file so that the LAN Manager software does not load automatically. (Save a backup copy of the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.) Reboot the computer again and determine if the problem still exists. Do one of the following: If the trouble exists when LAN Manager is not running, the trouble is not network-related, but may be due to a problem with the computers operating system, the computer hardware itself, or an application program you may be running. Notify your administrator. If the trouble goes away when LAN Manager is not running, the trouble may be network-related. Notify your administrator.

If this procedure does not identify the source of your problem, notify your administrator.

Troubleshooting a Shared Printer

This section describes problems that may arise with a shared printer that is using clipcach or clispool. The problem descriptions include recommended resolutions.

318

Troubleshooting Isolating Problems

Jobs Not Printing

Problem: A shared printer is connected to parallel port LPT1 (PRN) on your workstation. You send print jobs to that printer over the network (rather than locally), but they do not print. The error only applies to workstations using clispool or clipcach with LAN Manager for UNIX Systems servers. Resolution: Type net use. Then do one of the following:
If the display shows that the LPT1 (PRN) port ID is linked to the printer, unlink that port ID, and then link an unused port ID to the printer. The LPT1 or PRN port must be reserved for the physical connection to the printer. If the display shows that LPT1 is not linked, follow these steps: 1 2 3 Confirm that the printer queue is released. Confirm that the print job is in the printer queue. Type net use to check that your workstation has linked a drive to the spool area. The name is usually the computername of your workstation appended with the letter Z. 4 Type dir driveid to check that the job is in the spool area. Replace driveid with the drive you located in step 3. 5 6 Type clispool or clipcach as appropriate to verify that the printing software is operating correctly. Confirm that the printer is turned on, is online, and is operating correctly.

Jobs Not Printing in the Background

Problem: Print jobs will not print at your shared workstation printer while you run an application, but the jobs complete successfully when you exit to the MS-DOS system. Resolution: Under MS-DOS versions earlier than 3.2, the print command cannot do background printing in all circumstances. If you are using a version of MS-DOS earlier than 3.2, do not run the application when print jobs are expected from the server, or upgrade to MS-DOS version 3.2 or later.

319

Troubleshooting Isolating Problems

Text Entered Is Not Displayed

Problem: A printer is connected to a serial port of your workstation. Your workstation is turned on and linked to the server, but nothing appears onscreen when you type. Resolution: The printer connected to your serial port may be ofine. Check the indicator lights on the printer and turn it online if required. For information on turning the printer online, see your printer guide.
Drive ID Unlinked

Problem: One of your linked drive IDs has become unlinked from a shared directory. Resolution: Type net use, then do one of the following:
If the display shows an error with the link, unlink the drive ID, and then link it again. If the display shows that the drive ID is linked to the printers spool directory, link a different drive ID to the shared directory from which you were unlinked. The printers spool directory is displayed as the workstations computername usually followed by the letter Z.

Keyboard Locked Up

Problem: You are using an application at your workstation. Your workstation has a shared printer connected to it. Occasionally the keyboard appears to lock up for a few seconds, especially when a print job is in progress. Resolution: This hesitation at the keyboard is normal under these circumstances, especially when the printer is connected to a serial port.

320

Using Remote Access Service

321

Using Remote Access Service Isolating Problems

The Remote Access service (RAS) allows off-site PC users transparent access to network resources via a telephone connection with a network. This appendix describes how to install RAS on a workstation running MS-DOS version 3.3 or later with or without Microsoft Windows versions 3.0 or 3.1. It describes how to use a Windows NT or LAN Manager network from a remote workstation and how to troubleshoot any problems that may occur. It also includes information on modifying your modem information script and conguration les. When RAS is installed, your workstation has a Phone Book program for entering and maintaining the names and telephone numbers of remote networks. You can connect to and disconnect from these networks from either the command line or the Phone Book program, using one of many different types of modems. Once you are connected to a network, you have access to network resources as if you were in the ofce, subject to the same privilege and permission restrictions. You can use net commands, access shared directories and printers, and use client-server applications. RAS also saves memory on your workstation, because you dont need to load multiple protocols to use multiple networks. For information on using RAS from Windows for Workgroups workstations or MS-DOS Workgroup Connection workstations, see the Release Notes with your Network Client manuals, along with your Windows for Workgroups or Workgroup Connection manual(s). For information on installing RAS on a server, see your Windows NT manuals.

322

Using Remote Access Service Installing RAS

Installing RAS
This section includes information on how to install RAS on workstations running MS-DOS, with or without Microsoft Windows, and how to install RAS when you need to use the network in the ofce and from a remote site. If you will only be using your workstation for dialing in to a network, go directly to the following sections. If you need to connect to a network both from a remote site and from your ofce, your workstation must have a LAN Manager network driver to access the network from the ofce, and the RAS drivers to access the network from a remote site. See Installing on Dual-Role Workstations, later in this appendix.

Installing on MS-DOS
LAN Manager workstation software must be loaded on your workstation prior to installing RAS.
To install RAS on MS-DOS 1 2 Insert the RAS installation disk in drive A. Type a:\setup. The Setup box appears on the screen. Use the TAB key to move around in the Setup box. Pressing ENTER selects the highlighted option. If the Setup program detects that a network adapter driver has been congured, the program asks whether the user plans to use a: Network adapter or modem, but not both at the same time. Network adapter and modem at the same time.

If you plan to use a computer both at and away from the ofce, select the rst option. If you plan to use a computer only at the ofce, select the second option. If no network adapter is detected, the Setup program assumes you will only be using RAS from a remote site. The system installs the les, and the Add COM Port box appears on the screen. 3 Specify a port and click the OK button. See the Help screen for detailed information on port setting choices.

323

Using Remote Access Service Installing RAS

The Conguration box appears on the screen. 4 Choose one or more of the following: 5 6 To accept the configuration defaults as indicated on the screen, choose the OK button. To choose a different port, click the Add Port button, and specify the port you want to use (for example, COM2). To choose a different type of modem, click the Select Modem button, and select your modem type. To load the RAS drivers manually at startup, click on the X.

Choose the OK button. The Install Complete box appears on the screen. Restart your computer.

For additional instructions, use Setup Help, or contact your network administrator.

Installing on Microsoft Windows

LAN Manager must be loaded on your workstation prior to installing RAS. Once the software is installed on Microsoft Windows, the RAS Phone Book will be on your Microsoft Windows version 3.1 screen.
To install RAS on Microsoft Windows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Follow the steps in Installing on MS-DOS. Type win to start the Windows operating system. From the Program Manager, choose File. From the File menu, choose New. From the New Program Object dialog box, choose Program Item. Choose the OK button. In the Description box, enter the following: REMOTE ACCESS PHONE BOOK 8 In the Command Line box, enter the following: RASPHONE.EXE

324

Using Remote Access Service Installing RAS

Choose the Change Icon. The Select Icon dialog box appears.

10 In the File Name box, enter one of following: If you are running LAN Manager Enhanced, enter: C:\LANMAN.DOS\NETPROG\RASPHONE.ICO - Or If you are running LAN Manager Basic, enter: C:\LANMAN.DOS\BASIC\RASPHONE.ICO If you have installed LAN Manager to a directory other than C:\LANMAN.DOS, replace C:\LANMAN.DOS with that directory name. 11 Choose the OK button. 12 In the Program Properties dialog box, choose the OK button.

Installing on Dual-Role Workstations

Your workstation must have a LAN Manager network driver to access the network from the ofce and the RAS drivers to access the network from a remote site. However, you only use one set of these drivers at a time. This section shows you how to unload whichever driver you arent using. To set up your workstation to connect to the network from a remote site
Unload any network protocol drivers used at the office by typing unload protocol before loading the RAS drivers and attempting a remote connection.

NOTE:

The unload command will not unload device drivers or terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) programs that do not conform to the LAN Manager Demand Protocol Architecture (DPA), such as statically loaded protocols. Type load /i to see the names of the protocols that can be unloaded using the unload command. Protocols must be unloaded in the reverse order of which they are listed. If the protocol you are running cannot be unloaded using the unload command, you may unload it by running the LAN Manager Setup program, removing that protocol from your configuration, and rebooting your computer.

Now you can use the commands in Using the Network, later in this appendix, to connect to the network from a remote site.

325

Using Remote Access Service Installing RAS

To set up your workstation to connect to the network from the ofce

1 Type rasload /u to unload the RAS drivers and to stop the Workstation service. Use rasload /u /y to answer yes to all the questions normally asked when stopping the Workstation service. Type load protocol to load the protocol you need to use to connect to the Windows NT or LAN Manager network.

If your workstation is in the ofce and is connected by cable to the network, the LAN Manager commands described in this manual will work.

Conserving Memory on MS-DOS Workstations

This section describes two ways to conserve memory: unloading the RAS drivers when you dont need them, and loading the RAS drivers into upper memory when they are in use.
Unloading the RAS Drivers

Type rasload /u to unload the RAS drivers and stop the Workstation service. Use rasload /u /y to answer yes to all the questions normally asked when stopping the Workstation service.
Loading the RAS Drivers Into Upper Memory with LAN Manager

On MS-DOS client workstations, the RAS Setup program adds the following lines to the [asybeui_xif] section of PROTOCOL.INI:
load="asybeui", "vcommiod[u]", "wantsr[u]" unload="wantsr /u[c]", "vcommiod /u[c]", "asybeui[du]"

The [u] switch in the LOAD= line allows MS-DOS version 5 or 6 to load the RAS drivers into upper memory. You can also use a third-party memory manager to load the drivers into upper memory. For example, if you are using Quarterdeck expanded memory manager QEMM386, you would insert the QEMM386 LOADHI command as follows:
load="loadhi lanman.dos\drivers\protocol\asybeui\asybeui[cbr]", "loadhi vcommiod[c]", "loadhi wantsr[c]" unload="wantsr /u[c]", "vcommiod /u[c]", "asybeui[du]"

326

Using Remote Access Service Installing RAS

The LOAD command accepts the following switches:

Switch u Meaning When used in the LOAD= line, the program is loaded into upper memory blocks on MS-DOS version 5 or 6, if possible; otherwise the program is loaded into conventional memory. When used in the UNLOAD= line, the program is unloaded. No attempt is made to load the program into upper memory blocks. Binds the protocol to the hardware device driver. Registers the protocol with the LAN Manager redirector. Deregisters the protocol from the LAN Manager redirector.

c b r d

The default switches are [ubr]. Before binding, be sure the program is already loaded; that is, use [u] or [c] before using [b]. Before registering, be sure that the le is both loaded and bound; that is, use [u] or [c] and [b] before using [r].

327

Using Remote Access Service Using the Network

Using the Network

This section includes information on connecting to, using, and disconnecting from the network, and provides a command summary.

Connecting to the Network

NOTE: You must load RAS before you start the Windows operating system. If you are using your computer to connect sometimes by modem and sometimes by network adapter card, you should not start Windows from your AUTOEXEC.BAT file, or if you prefer, remember to exit Windows, load RAS, and then return to Windows. If you are using Microsoft Windows version 3.0 with a serial mouse, start Windows before using RAS to connect to the network. If you start Windows after establishing a connection, the connection may be lost.

To load the RAS drivers manually, start at step 1. If you accepted the Setup default to load the RAS drivers automatically, start at step 2. To connect to a Windows NT or LAN Manager Network
1 2 If the RAS drivers are not loaded automatically on your workstation, type rasload at the MS-DOS command prompt. At the MS-DOS prompt, type rasphone to open the Phone Book. -OrFrom the Windows interface, click on the RAS Phone Book icon. 3 4 Create and save a Phone Book entry (use Phone Book Help). Connect to the network (use Phone Book Help).

You can now use the network as if you were in your ofce.
NOTE: You can access data files across the telephone connection, but loading software programs across the network via a telephone line will cause extremely long delays. Contact your network administrator for more details.

328

Using Remote Access Service Using the Network

Disconnecting from the Network

To disconnect from the network
1 At the MS-DOS prompt, type rasphone to open the Phone Book. -OrFrom the Windows interface, click on the RAS Phone Book icon. 2 Disconnect from the network (use Phone Book Help).

User Commands
The following commands use RAS to access your LAN Manager or Windows NT network remotely.
Command rasphone rasdial rasload rasload /u rasload /u /y Action Opens the Phone Book. Allows you to connect and disconnect. Loads the RAS drivers. Unloads the RAS drivers and stops the Workstation service if necessary. Unloads RAS drivers and answers yes to all the questions normally asked when stopping the Workstation service.

Type /help after any command to get more information about that command. For example, type rasdial /help to learn more about the rasdial command.

329

Using Remote Access Service Using the Network

Finding Help About Phone Book

While you are using the RAS Phone Book, you can get Help with the following commands.
Command General Help Help for Screens Help for Error Messages Action Select the Help index. Click the screens Help button. Press F1 when an error message occurs.

Modifying Phone Numbers

The following characters can be used to modify phone numbers in the RAS Phone Book.
Character , @ P T W Function Pauses briey (2 seconds for most modems) Waits for extended silence before continuing. Use with 2400 baud or greater modems. Switches from touch-tone to pulse/rotary dialing. Switches from pulse/rotary to touch-tone dialing. Waits for a dial tone before continuing. Use with 2400 baud or greater modems.

See Phone Book Help for additional details. The PHONE.INF le contains information describing each Phone Book entry on a RAS client workstation. To guard against possible corruption of PHONE.INF, back up the le regularly. Because this le is created and maintained by the RAS Phone Book utility, do not attempt to modify it unless absolutely necessary. If you do decide to modify PHONE.INF, be sure to back up the le rst.

330

Using Remote Access Service Using the Network

CAUTION:

Removing LAN Manager deletes this le. Be sure to back up PHONE.INF before removing LAN Manager. Removing the RAS client software while leaving LAN Manager intact does not delete this le.

331

Using Remote Access Service Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
This section explains how to solve common problems and provides a complete list of error codes.

Common Problems
Network Access Problems

If you are denied access to your network, contact your network administrator. You may not have a valid user account on your Windows NT or LAN Manager network, or you may not have permission to dial in.
Connection and Response Problems

If the RAS server is not responding, one or more of the following may be true:
The RAS server is not running. Contact your network administrator. You are using an incompatible version of the RAS software. Contact your network administrator. The modem on the RAS server has been turned off. Contact your network administrator. Your modem and/or modem configurations are incompatible with the modem on the RAS server. Contact your network administrator. Your hotel room telephone line cannot accommodate your current modem speed. Use a lower baud rate, or contact the hotel manager to request a direct line. You specified the wrong telephone number. Update your Phone Book entry and redial. You did not specify a special number that gives you an outside line. For example, some businesses and hotels require you to dial 9 before dialing your number. There is static on the telephone line. Contact your phone service provider.u The RAS server does not call back as expected. Your account may not be properly configured, or your modem setting may be incorrect on the server. Contact your network administrator. You cannot access network resources even though the connection appears intact.

332

Using Remote Access Service Troubleshooting

Contact your system administrator. You are disconnected from the network when you start Microsoft Windows version 3.0. When running MS-DOS and Microsoft Windows version 3.0 and using a serial mouse, be sure to start the Windows operating system before connecting. Alternatively, you can upgrade to Microsoft Mouse version 8.0 or later. When using the version 8.0 mouse driver, change the second line in the MOUSE.INI file from AUTOMATIC SEARCH to SERIAL1 or SERIAL2, depending on which serial port the mouse is attached to. Contact Microsoft Product Support Services for information on upgrading mouse drivers.

Modem Problems

If your modem is not responding properly, one of the following may be true:
Your modem has been turned off or unplugged. Your modem is not properly connected to your computer. Your modem is in an inconsistent state. Restart or reset your modem and redial. Your modem and/or modem cables are defective. Contact your network administrator to make sure you have the correct modem cable for RAS. Your modem type is not supported by RAS, or it is not a fully compatible version of the modem type you selected. Contact your network administrator. Your modem is not configured correctly. See your modem user guide, or contact your network administrator. If your modem connects at a lower baud rate than you specified, the RAS server may have a modem type different from what you are using. Contact your network administrator.

Display Problems

If your screen blacks out when running MS-DOS and the version 7.0.4 mouse driver, upgrade your mouse driver to version 8.0 or later.
Loading and Unloading Problems

If you encounter problems when loading the RAS drivers, one of the following may be true:
The RAS drivers are already loaded. There is insufficient MS-DOS memory available. Unload some TSR) programs

333

Using Remote Access Service Troubleshooting

and try again. There is insufficient storage space on your hard disk. Ensure that your hard disk has a least 1MB of free space.

If you encounter problems when unloading the RAS drivers, one of the following may be true:
A telephone connection still exists. Drivers will not unload if a telephone connection exists. This protects you from accidentally hanging up a connection and losing data. Save your data files, disconnect the phone line, and then try the rasload /u command again. You have an incorrect TSR unloading order. Before unloading RAS, you must unload all TSR programs that were loaded after RAS was loaded. For example, if you loaded DOSKEY after loading RAS, you must unload DOSKEY prior to unloading RAS. Typing net start workstation after typing the rasload command also causes a TSR unloading error. Restart and then unload the RAS drivers.

Performance Problems

If you encounter poor performance while using RAS, one of the following may be true:
If you encounter errors on the line and poor performance, contact your network administrator. If it takes a long time to log on to your network after you establish a connection, you may have many persistent network connections. You could remove all persistent connections by typing net use /persistent=no at the command line, or add autorestore=no and saveconnections=no in the [netshell] section of LANMAN.INI, or you could save only the connections you set up at login by typing net use /persistent:save. If this doesnt improve logon performance, check with your network administrator.

Error Codes
This section lists the error codes sent by rasdial, the command-line version of Remote Access service. If you are calling from the MS-DOS command line, you can use the error level returned to look up the cause of the error in the following table. Error codes that are not self-explanatory are followed by a description.

334

Using Remote Access Service Troubleshooting

Error Code ERR_USEDPORT ERR_BADBAUD ERR_NOPORT ERR_CONNECTION_TIMEOUT ERR_REMOTE_DISCONNECTED ERR_HARDWARE_FAILURE ERR_MODEM_NOT_RESPONDING

Error Level 612 615 620 631 632 633 640

Description The port is already in use. The baud rate cannot be set for the port. The port is already in use. A timeout occurred while trying to establish a connection. The remote side has been disconnected. Hardware (the modem most probably) has failed. The modem did not echo back the string or did not respond to the string with something like OK.

ERR_MODEMS_INI_FILE_CORRUPTED ERR_UNEXPECTED_MODEM_STRING

642 643 A modem string not listed in the MODEMS.INF le was returned.

ERR_COULD_NOT_OPEN_MODEMS_INI ERR_INVALID_MODEM_COMMAND ERR_NULL_PHONENUMBER ERR_SYNTAX_ERROR ERR_WANTSR_NOT_LOADED

644 645 646 648 652 Because rasload was not executed before attempting a connection, a TSR program required by RAS was not loaded.

ERR_INVALID_USERNAME

653

335

Using Remote Access Service Troubleshooting

Error Code ERR_INVALID_PASSWORD ERR_WKSTA_NOT_STARTED ERR_PHONEBOOK_EMPTY ERR_CANNOT_GET_LANA ERR_INVALID_PHONE_NUMBER ERR_CANNOT_BIND_LANA

Error Level 654 664 665 669 668 670

Description

A conguration problem exists. Run Setup again.

A conguration problem exists. Unload NetBEUI and start again. If the problem persists, reinstall RAS.

ERR_CANNOT_UNBIND_LANA ERR_NOT_AUTHENTICATED ERR_COULD_NOT_OPEN_COMDEV_INI ERR_COULD_NOT_OPEN_PHONE_INI ERR_CORRUPT_COMDEVINI_ENTRY ERR_CORRUPT_PHONEINI_ENTRY ERR_ENTRY_NOT_FOUND ERR_CORRUPT_COMDEVINI ERR_CONNECTION_EXISTS ERR_SERVER_NOT_RESPONDING ERR_TOO_MANY_INITIAL_NAMES

671 672 675 676 677 678 682 683 684 685 686

336

Using Remote Access Service Troubleshooting

Error Code ERR_CANNOT_GET_COMPUTERNAME

Error Level 687

Description The user is running a LAN Manager Basic workstation. Either install LAN Manager Enhanced or specify the computer name when starting the Workstation service.

ERR_MSG_ALIAS_NOT_ADDED ERR_NAME_OUT_OF_RESOURCES

689 690 The RAS server does not have enough resources to add all the NetBIOS names for the client machine. Ask the network administrator to increase NetBIOS resources on the server.

ERR_NAME_ADD_CONFLICT ERR_NO_DIALIN_PERM ERR_LISTEN_TIMEOUT MODEM_RC_NO_CARRIER MODEM_RC_NO_DIALTONE MODEM_RC_NO_ANSWER MODEM_RC_BUSY MODEM_RC_LOOP MODEM_RC_ERROR ERR_CANNOT_OPEN_PAD_INI ERR_PAD_INI_FILE_CORRUPTED ERR_UNEXPECTED_PAD_STRING

692 694 695 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6112 6113 6114 The PAD responded with a string not recognized by RAS. Your modem returned a generic error code. Redial.

337

Using Remote Access Service Troubleshooting

Error Code ERR_PAD_NOT_RESPONDING ERR_NULL_X25ADD PAD_RC_ERROR

Error Level 6115 6116 6117

Description

No X.25 address was supplied to make the connection. The PAD returned a string denoting an error condition.

338

Using Remote Access Service Modems

Modems
This section includes information on using nonsupported modems and modifying your modem conguration le, MODEMS.INF, which contains information describing each modem type supported by RAS. You should not modify this le except to add sections for modems that are not already supported.

Using Nonsupported Modems

If you have a modem that is not supported by RAS, try using the settings for a modem that is supported. If you are unable to nd a modem setting that is compatible, you can modify your MODEMS.INF le. Consult your modem manuals or modem manufacturer for further help. This section includes information to help you modify your MODEMS.INF le.

Understanding MODEMS.INF
The MODEMS.INF le lists all the modems supported by RAS, along with the initialization, dial, and listen command strings each modem needs for correct operation. When you select a modem during RAS installation, the Setup program associates the selected modem with the specied communication port. RAS connection utilities read MODEMS.INF to obtain the command strings for the modem associated with each communication port.
NOTE: The MODEMS.INF file is different for MS-DOS client workstations than for Windows NT workstations or Windows NT Advanced Servers. Use the MODEM.INF information in this chapter, rather than the information in the Windows NT manuals, even if you are connecting to a Windows NT network.

The MODEMS.INF le consists of two main parts:

A [default] section Individual sections for each supported modem

339

Using Remote Access Service Modems

The [default] section contains command strings shared in common by most supported modems. The sections for individual modems contain command strings that differ from those in the [default] section. The following MODEMS.INF listing includes introductory comments, the complete [default] section, and two sample sections for particular modems.
#----------------------------------------------------------------# Some normal commands used. Where the commands are different for a # particular modem, the new/different commands are listed under the # section for that specific modem. #----------------------------------------------------------------# &F Recall factory settings # L1 Low speaker volume # &C1 Track presence of data carrier # &D2 Hang up and disable autoanswer when DTR goes from ON to OFF # Q0 Modem returns result codes # V1 Verbose (English words) return codes # E1 Enable character echo in command state # S7 Wait time for carrier # &Q0 Async connection # S0 Answer on ring number # S2 Escape character #----------------------------------------------------------------[Default] MAXBAUD = 2400 [Default.INIT] [Default.INIT.COMMAND] COMMAND = AT&F &C1 &D2 Q0 v1 S0=0 S2=128 S7=55*cr [Default.INIT.RESPONSE] OK = *cr*lfOK*cr*lf ERROR = *cr*lfERROR*cr*lf [Default.LISTEN] [Default.LISTEN.COMMAND] COMMAND = *cr*ATS0=1*cr [Default.LISTEN.RESPONSE] OK = *cr*lfOK*cr*lf ERROR = *cr*lfERROR*cr*lf [Default.LISTEN.RESPONSE] LOOP = *cr*lfRING*cr*lf CONNECT = *cr*lfCONNECT*blank*baudrate*cr*lf NO_CARRIER = *cr*lfNO*blankCarrier*lf [Default.DIAL] [Default.DIAL.COMMAND] COMMAND = ATDT*phonenumber*cr [Default.DIAL.RESPONSE] CONNECT = *cr*lf CONNECT*blank*baudrate CONNECT = *cr*lfPLEASE*blankSET*blankTO*blank*baudrate*cr*lf CONNECT = *cr*lfCONNECT

340

Using Remote Access Service Modems

ERROR = *cr*lfERROR*cr*lf LOOP = *cr*lfRINGING*cr*lf NO_CARRIER = *cr*lfNO*blankCARRIER*cr*lf NO_CARRIER = *cr*lfVOICE*cr*lf NO_DIALTONE = *cr*lfNO*blankDIAL*blankTONE*cr*lf NO_DIALTONE = *cr*lfNO*blank*DIALTONE*cr*lf BUSY = *cr*lfBUSY*cr*lf NO_ANSWER = *cr*lfNO*blankANSWER*cr*lf #----------------------------------------------------------------[Hayes_V_Series_9600] # &Q5 -- Error control connection # S36=1 -- Fallback to async, no speed buffering MAXBAUD = 9600 [Hayes_V_9600.INIT] [Hayes_V_Series_9600.INIT.COMMAND] COMMAND = AT&F &C1 &D2 Q0) V1 S0=0 S2=128 S7=55 &Q5 S36=1*cr [Hayes_V_Series_9600.INIT.RESPONSE] OK = *cr*lfOK*cr*lf ERROR = *cr*lfERROR*cr*lf #----------------------------------------------------------------[Intel_9600EX] # \N1 Direct Mode # Command line length cannot exceed 40 MAXBAUD = 9600 [Intel_9600EX.INIT] [Intel_9600EX.COMMAND] command = AT&F&C1&D2 V1 S0=0 S2=128 S7=55 &Q0 \N1*cr [Intel_9600EX.INIT.RESPONSE] OK = *cr*lfOK*cr*lf ERROR = *cr*lfERROR*cr*lf #-----------------------------------------------------------------

In the MODEMS.INF le, a pound sign (#) preceding a line indicates a comment, which the Setup program ignores. Asterisks (*) are escape characters that precede macros. These macros and the functions they perform are listed in the following table:
Macro baudrate blank cr lf phonenumber Function Inserts baud rate Inserts a blank character Inserts a carriage return Inserts a line feed Inserts phone number

341

Using Remote Access Service Modems

When you select a modem during RAS installation, the Setup program looks for a section with the name [modemname.INIT]. If it does not nd one, it uses the initialization strings dened in the [default] section. For example, the Hayes Smartmodem 2400 uses the same set of command strings as listed in the [default] section. Therefore, the only line in the [Hayes_Smartmodem_2400] section is the MAXBAUD line.
#----------------------------------------------------------------[Hayes_Smartmodem_2400] MAXBAUD = 2400

The Intel_9600EX modem, however, uses different initialization strings from those shown in the default section. Therefore, these strings are dened separately in the [Intel_9600EX] section.
#----------------------------------------------------------------[Intel_9600EX] # \N1 Direct Mode # Command line length cannot exceed 40 MAXBAUD = 9600 [Intel_9600EX.INIT] [Intel_9600EX.COMMAND] command = AT&F&C1&D2 V1 S0=0 S2=128 S7=55 &Q0 \N1*cr [Intel_9600EX.INIT.RESPONSE] OK = *cr*lfOK*cr*lf ERROR = *cr*lfERROR*cr*lf #-----------------------------------------------------------------

Because the Intel_9600EX modem uses the LISTEN and DIAL strings listed in the [default] section, only the INIT strings need to be listed in the [Intel_9600EX] section. If a modem's command strings are identical to those already listed for another modem, the name of the latter modem can be used as an alias for the former. For example, the MODEMS.INF section for Hayes_Ultra reads:
#------------------------------------------------------------[Hayes_Ultra] MAXBAUD = 9600 Alias=Hayes_V_Series_9600

The Alias line tells the Setup program that the Hayes Ultra modem uses the same command set as the Hayes V Series 9600 modem.

342

Using Remote Access Service Modems

Adding a New Modem to MODEMS.INF NOTE: Microsoft Product Support Services only supports the version of MODEMS.INF that ships with Microsoft LAN Manager Remote Access service. If you modify the file and your new modem does not work, restore the original version of the file, and use one of the modems listed earlier in this appendix.

If you are using a modem that is not explicitly supported in MODEMS.INF, you can append a new section containing the command strings required by your modem. The name of the section should be the name of your modem and should be enclosed in brackets. If the [default] section does not contain the command strings required by your modem, use the macros dened in the preceding section to dene new ones. Examples of their use are shown in the listing of the MODEMS.INF le.
NOTE: When adding a new section to MODEMS.INF, append it to the end of the file, rather than inserting it somewhere in the middle. This precaution reduces the chances of inadvertently corrupting existing entries.

To modify MODEMS.INF for a new modem

1 2 3 Back up your existing MODEMS.INF file. Type the section title, using the format [modemname]. Add a MAXBAUD line listing the modem's maximum baud rate. This is the computer-to-modem speed, not the modem-to-modem speed. Operating System MS-DOS and Microsoft Windows Processor 8086 80286 80386 80486 Maximum baud rate* 2400 9600 19200 38400

*May vary depending on CPU speed, memory speed, software running, and other factors.

343

Using Remote Access Service Modems

NOTE:

Every modem section must contain a line reading: MAXBAUD = x where x is the baud rate of the modem. The MAXBAUD line must be included, even if the modem is using the same baud rate as that listed in the [default] section. Whether other entries are included depends on whether a modem's init, listen, or dial strings match those in the [default] section. If they match, they do not have to be listed again in the modem's own section. 1 Check to see if the [modem_name.init] section for the modem needs to be different from the one listed in the [default] section. If it does, then add an [init] section to the section for the new modem, below the MAXBAUD line. If you changed the [modem_name.init] section, then repeat the previous step for the [modem_name.listen] and [modem_name.dial] sections. Normally, you should not have to change these sections.

Being meticulous when you create a new modem section can save debugging time later. It is recommended that you document your work so that others can quickly understand the entries in case you are not available, or so you can remember a year later what you did and why you did it. Be sure to type a pound sign (#) at the beginning of each comment line.
MODEMS.INF Macros

The following macros can be used in the MODEMS.INF le:

Macro hxx Function Inserts a character represented by the next two hexadecimal digits. For example, to send Ctrl+P (ASCII character 16), use *h10 (10 hex is 16 decimal). Matches any one character coming from the modem.

w (wildcard character)

Modifying Your Modem Initialization Strings

If you are adding a new modem, you may need to modify the modem initialization strings in the MODEMS.INF le.

344

Using Remote Access Service Modems

Refer to your modem manual for the specic commands you use to do the following:
Recall factory settings. Track presence of data-carrier-detect (DCD high when carrier detected). Hang up and disable auto-answer when DTR goes from ON to OFF (high to low). Return result codes. Return verbose codes. Enable character echo in command state. Wait approximately 55 seconds for carrier. Make normal asynchronous connection (only needed if your modem supports synchronous connections). Disable error control (disable MNP4, V42, or other error control scheme). Disable compression (disable MNP5, V.42bis, or other compression scheme). Disable +++ escape sequence. Disable software and hardware flow control. Modem Listen String (The specific command you use to make the modem answer after one ring, needed for RAS servers and also for client workstations that will be using callback.)

Error Control and Compression

RAS does not support error control and compression for the following reasons:
RAS for MS-DOS does not support Hardware Flow Control. Flow Control is needed to regulate data transfer when compression is enabled. Not all processors can accommodate the 19200 or greater baud rate required to make compression worthwhile at 9600 baud (see the table in the section, Adding a New Modem to MODEMS.INF, earlier in this appendix). Note that the baud rate specified in the MAXBAUD parameter of MODEMS.INF refers to the computer-to-modem speed, not the modem-to-modem speed. Not all modems can accommodate the 19200 or greater baud rate required to enable compression. A 16450 or higher serial port chip is required.

345

Using Remote Access Service Modems

If you decide to enable error control and/or compression, rst check the following:
Make sure your workstation can accommodate the higher baud rates required for compression. Your RAS client workstation must have a 80386 or higher processor and also have 16450 or higher serial port chip installed. Make sure your RAS server has a multiport adapter installed, relieving the main processor of some of the interrupt processing load. Make sure your modem has the large buffers needed to increase the DTE speed without enabling flow control. Make sure you have identical or compatible modem types on the server and client workstations. Make sure your telephone line has little or no static. This minimizes the impact of redundant error control.

To enable modem error correction and/or compression

1 Set the MAXBAUD parameter for your modem in the MODEMS.INF file to the maximum baud rate at which you will be communicating. Valid baud rates are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400. For MS-DOS workstations running LAN Manager Enhanced, change digit 14 of the wrkheuristics line in the LANMAN.INI file from 1 to 0. This causes the LAN Manager workstation to transfer data in 64K blocks. This large block size ensures a smooth, constant flow of data from the computer to the modem. The modems compression buffers will fill up quickly, thereby minimizing data transmission delays.

NOTE:

Microsoft cannot guarantee proper functionality at baud rates higher than those indicated in the default MAXBAUD = line of your MODEMS.INF file.

346

Using Remote Access Service Conguration Files

Configuration Files
During installation, the RAS Setup program modies existing MS-DOS and LAN Manager conguration les to enable or to optimize performance. For MS-DOS and Windows client workstations, the RAS Setup program modies the CONFIG.SYS, LANMAN.INI, and PROTOCOL.INI les.

CONFIG.SYS
The RAS Setup program adds the following lines to an MS-DOS clients CONFIG.SYS le:
DEVICE = C:\LANMAN.DOS\DRIVERS\ASYNC\ASYMAC\ASYMAC.DOS

If necessary, the Setup program also adds the MS-DOS protocol manager, PROTMAN.DOS, to the device list. This line is in the form:
DEVICE = lC:\LANMAN.DOS\DRIVERS\PROTMAN\PROTMAN.DOS /i:lanroot

LANMAN.INI
The RAS Setup program modies the wrkheuristics and wrknets entries of the [workstation] section as follows:
wrkheuristics = xxxxxxxx00xxxx1xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx wrknets = netx, nety,...

PROTOCOL.INI
The RAS Setup program adds the following lines to the client's PROTOCOL.INI le:
[ASYBEUI_XIF] DRIVERNAME = ASYBEUI BINDINGS = "ASY_NIF", "ASY_NIF2" LOAD = ASYBEUI,VCOMMIOD[U],WANTSR[U] UNLOAD = "WANTSR /U[C]","VCOMMIOD /U[C]", "ASYBEUI[D]" [ASY_NIF1] DRIVERNAME = ASYMAC$ [ASY_NIF2] DRIVERNAME = ASYMAC$

347

Using Remote Access Service Conguration Files

The Setup program adds one BINDINGS entry and one [ASY_NIFx] section for each COM port in the system, where x is the COM port number associated with each instance of the driver.

348

Using Remote Access Service Tuning

Tuning
This section includes modications you can make that will increase the performance of RAS. You can tune RAS performance on your system by modifying LANMAN.INI parameters.

Modifying LANMAN.INI on MS-DOS-based Workstations

On a LAN Manager Enhanced workstation, RAS modies the wrkheuristics entry of the [workstations] section for optimal performance over a telephone line. The modied wrkheuristics entry reads as follows:
wrkheuristics = xxxxxxxx00x6xx1xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

These settings are optimized for RAS. They are different from those for LAN Manager networks without RAS.
NOTE: If you use your workstation as a LAN workstation as well as a RAS workstation, the RAS optimization of wrkheuristics will cause the computer to operate at less than optimal levels when used as a LAN workstation. Performance on the LAN will be acceptable. The following wrkheuristics settings are changed: Position 8 9 14 Value 0 0 1 Meaning Do not request oplock (opportunistic locking). Do not use open and read. Do not use raw read/write server message blocks.

The reasons for these settings are as follows:

If oplock is turned on, the remote client's redirector opens files in exclusive mode and turns on the write behind, read ahead feature. If this feature is turned on and the telephone line is disconnected, data is lost. The telephone line may be disconnected by the user or by some hardware problem. If open and read is turned on, as soon as a user opens a file, the redirector reads data from that file before the user explicitly requests it to do so. This operation yields better system response on the LAN, but on an asynchronous line it unnecessarily retards performance in cases where the user does not want to read data

349

Using Remote Access Service Tuning

from the file. If the client uses raw I/O, file transfer occurs in 64K packets. Sending 64K packets over an asynchronous line is not advisable because other transactions will be delayed, and additional memory will be required at the RAS server to handle the large packets.

350

Using Remote Access Service Compatibility Issues

Compatibility Issues
RAS supports only version 2.0 of Stacker. If you are running Stacker version 1.1, upgrade to version 2.0. If your network directory (for example, LANMAN.DOS, WINDOWS, DOS, DOSNET) is on a Stacker drive, make sure that Stacker is started before the protocol manager in your CONFIG.SYS le.

351

Using Remote Access Service Compatibility Issues

352

Glossary

account See user account. administrator The individual responsible for managing the local area network. Typically this person configures the network, maintains the networks shared resources and security system, creates user accounts, assigns permissions, and helps users. alert message A message sent by a server to a LAN Manager Enhanced workstation informing the user of conditions that require attention. Alerter service Notifies selected users and computers of administrative alerts that occur on a computer. Requires the Messenger service. alias A name used to receive messages at a LAN Manager Enhanced workstation. A workstation can have up to 15 aliases, including the computername and username. An alias must be unique on the local area network. application program A program used for a particular kind of work, such as word processing or database management. ASCII file A standard text file. basic See LAN Manager Basic. batch file See batch program. batch program A text file containing commands that are performed when the batch program runs. MS-DOS batch

programs always have the filename extension .BAT. A batch program called AUTOEXEC.BAT runs when you start MS-DOS. baud This is a unit for measuring the speed at which a modem communicates. Baud rate is often used to refer to bits per second, but that is not completely accurate. Baud rate refers to the number of times the condition of the line changes; it is equal to bits per second only if each signal corresponds to one bit of data being transmitted. For two modems to communicate, they must use the same baud rate. If the baud rate of one modem is initially set higher than that of the other, the faster modem normally alters its baud rate to match that of the slower modem. branch A segment of the directory tree, representing a directory and any subdirectories it contains. broadcast message A message sent to all users in a domain or on the local area network. See also Messenger service. buffer A portion of computer memory that is reserved to store data temporarily. callback number The number that a Remote Access server uses to call back a user. This number can be preset by the administrator or specified by the user at the time of each call, depending on how the administrator configured the user's callback status. The callback number should be the number of the phone line to which the user's modem is connected.

353

Glossary

callback security A form of network security in which a Remote Access server calls a user back at a preset number after the user has made an initial connection and has been authenticated. check box A small box in a dialog box that can be selected or cleared, representing an option that you can turn on or off. When a check box is selected, an X appears in the box. choose To pick an item that begins an action. You often choose a command on a menu to perform a task, and you choose an icon to start an application. click To position the mouse pointer on a screen element and then press and release the left mouse button. See also double-click. client A computer that accesses shared network resources provided by another computer. See also client-server applications, server. client-server applications Applications that use the capabilities of both your workstation (the client) and the server to perform a task. The client portion of the application is typically optimized for user interaction, whereas the server portion provides the centralized multiuser functionality. command An instruction that provides the necessary information for a computer or a program to perform a specific task. You type LAN Manager Basic commands at the MS-DOS prompt. You type LAN Manager Enhanced commands at the MS-DOS prompt or

choose them from a menu on the LAN Manager Screen. command button A command name enclosed in angle brackets at the bottom of the LAN Manager Screen or dialog box (for example, the Zoom button). Choosing a command button carries out a task or leads to another dialog box. command line The MS-DOS prompt. See also command, prompt. command option See option. communication port A port on computer equipment that enables asynchronous transmission of one byte at a time. Also called a serial port. communication settings Operating parameters, such as baud rate and modem type, that apply to serial ports on the computer. compression A technique used to reduce the number of characters transmitted, without losing data content. The transmitting modem or computer compresses the data, and the receiving computer or modem decompresses the data back to its original state. computer resource See resource. computername A unique name that identifies a computer to the network. The name cannot be the same as any other computername or domain name in the network and cannot contain spaces. In a network path, a servers computername is preceded by two backslashes (for

354

Glossary

example, \\SALES or \\MARKET.SERVE). If you are using LAN Manager Basic, the computername identifies your workstation to servers. configuration The way the workstation, server, or local area network is set up to function; pertains to both hardware and software. connect To assign a local devicename to a shared resource so you can use it with LAN Manager commands. See also devicename, shared resource. connected user A user accessing a computer or a resource across the network. connection The software link between a workstation and a shared resource. You make connections by assigning a local devicename on a workstation to a shared resource on a server. See also devicename, session, shared resource. continue To restart a LAN Manager service that was paused. See also pause. controller See domain controller. country code A code in a users account to specify the language in which the server sends messages. current focus The server or workstation that is the focus of activity when using the LAN Manager Screen. cursor The shape on the computer screen that shows you where the next character you type will appear.

demand protocol architecture (DPA) A feature of LAN Manager Enhanced that lets you load and unload protocols used to access different types of networks. demand loading The loading of protocols into the computers memory on an as-needed basis. destination directory The directory to which you intend to copy or move one or more files. device A piece of hardware that is attached to a computer to perform a specific function. There are two types of devicesdisks and printers. See also device driver, disk device, printer device. device driver Software that enables a computer to recognize and use a specific piece of hardware (device). devicename The name of a device on a computer or the name of a device assigned to connect to a shared resource. The devicename is the name by which LAN Manager and the computer identify disk devices and printer devices. Two types of devicenames are used for local area network connections: disk devicenames (for example, E), and printer devicenames (for example, LPT1). See also disk device, printer device. dialog box A box that appears on the LAN Manager Screen when a menu command is chosen. Dialog boxes typically present a number of options from which you can choose. Sometimes

355

Glossary

selecting an option from one dialog box causes another dialog box to appear. directory Part of a structure for organizing your files on a disk. A directory can contain files and other directories (called subdirectories). See also directory tree. directory tree A graphical display of a disks directory structure. The directories on the disk are shown as a branching structure. The top-level directory is the root directory. disk device A device that stores information. Disk devices are identified by their devicenames. See also devicename. disk directory See directory. disk drive devicename See devicename, disk device. distributed application See clientserver applications. domain In LAN Manager or Windows NT Advanced Server, a group of devices, servers, and workstations grouped together to simplify network administration and security. Each domain has a unique name. Being logged on in one domain does not limit access to resources in other domains to which you have access. See also logon domain, other domains, primary domain controller, workstation domain. domain controller For a Windows NT Advanced Server domain, the server that

maintains the security policy and the master database for a domain and authenticates domain logons. For a LAN Manager domain, the server that verifies a user is allowed to log on in a domain and maintains a master record of user accounts. See also primary domain controller, server, user account. domain name The name by which a domain is known to the network. double-click To position the mouse pointer on a screen element, and then quickly press and release a mouse button twice without moving the mouse. Double-clicking carries out an action, such as starting an application. Enhanced See LAN Manager Enhanced. error detection A technique for detecting when data is lost during transmission. This enables the software to recover lost data by asking the transmitting computer to retransmit the data. error log A file that stores error messages received by a LAN Manager Enhanced workstation. error message A message that appears on your computer screen when Windows NT, LAN Manager, or MS-DOS detects a problem while trying to process an operation or a command. extension The period (.) and one to three characters at the end of a filename. An extension usually indicates the type of file or directory.

356

Glossary

field One of the five areas within a dialog box. See also check box, command button, dialog box, list box, option button, text box. file attribute Special properties of a file. The options are read-only and archive. Assigned to files and directories using the MS-DOS attrib command. file system In an operating system, the overall structure in which files are named, stored, and organized. filename A unique name for a file. MS-DOS filenames can be from one to eight characters in length and can be followed by a filename extension consisting of a period (.) and one to three characters. See also filename extension. filename extension A period (.) and one to three characters that can be appended to a filename. See also filename. forwarding messages See message forwarding. group A set of users who share common permissions for one or more shared resources. See also user account. groupname The name assigned by an administrator to a group of users. high-performance file system See HPFS. home directory A directory on a server that is accessible to the user and contains files and programs for that user. A home

directory can be assigned to an individual user or can be shared by many users. HPFS High-performance file system (HPFS); primarily used with the OS/2 operating system version 1.2 or later. It supports long filenames but does not provide security. HPFS file system See HPFS. initialization file A file used to establish your own configuration for a program. For example, the LANMAN.INI file is used by the LAN Manager software to determine default settings for network services. See also LANMAN.INI. LAN See local area network (LAN). LAN Manager A software program that expands the features of MS-DOS to enable computers to join a local area network. See also local area network (LAN). LAN Manager Basic A version of LAN Manager that enables an MS-DOS computer to connect to local area network directories and printers, and to print jobs over the network. With LAN Manager Basic, network tasks can be done from the command line only. LAN Manager Enhanced A version of LAN Manager that enables an MS-DOS computer to connect to local area network directories and printers, print jobs over the network, send and receive network messages, and automatically connect to network resources. With

357

Glossary

LAN Manager Enhanced, network tasks can be done from the command line and from the LAN Manager Screen. LAN Manager Screen A menuoriented, full-screen interface for LAN Manager Enhanced. With the LAN Manager Screen, you can use LAN Manager Enhanced without having to memorize command syntax. LANMAN.INI The initialization file that determines default settings for LAN Manager servers and workstations on the local area network. list box In a dialog box, a type of box that lists available choices for example, a list of all files in a directory. If all the choices do not fit in the list box, there is a scroll bar. local Refers to a resource attached to a users computer. See also remote. local area network (LAN) A group of personal computers and other hardware, attached by cable, so that users can share information and equipment. local devicename The devicename at your workstation that is assigned to a shared queue. See also devicename. local printer A printer that is directly connected to one of the ports on your computer. local resource See local. log A file containing a historical list of information. See also error log, message

log. log off The process of disconnecting a LAN Manager Enhanced workstation from its server to cancel connections to shared resources. The logoff process does not stop LAN Manager Enhanced services. log on With LAN Manager Enhanced, the process of connecting a workstation to a server and its shared resources. In the logon process, you supply your username and password, which identify you as a workstation and as a member of a domain. See also domain, password, username. logon domain A LAN Manager or Windows NT Advanced Server domain (other than the workstation domain) that can be specified when you log on with LAN Manager Enhanced. See also domain, other domains, workstation domain. logon hours For Windows NT Advanced Server and LAN Manager networks, a definition of the days and hours during which a user account can connect to a server. When a user is connected to a server and the logon hours are exceeded, the user will either be disconnected from all server connections or will be allowed to remain connected but denied any new connections. logon password The password specified when you log on at a LAN Manager Enhanced workstation. See also log on, password. logon script Typically a batch file, a

358

Glossary

logon script runs automatically every time the user logs on. It can be used to configure a users working environment at every logon, and it allows an administrator to affect a users environment without managing all aspects of it. A logon script can be assigned to one or more user accounts. logon server The server that verifies your username and password when you log on to the network. menu A set of related commands accessible from the LAN Manager Screen. menu bar The horizontal bar at the top of the LAN Manager Screen that contains menus from which you choose commands. menu command A command you can choose from a menu on the LAN Manager Screen. See also LAN Manager Screen, menu, menu bar. message alias See alias. message box A box that displays messages received at a LAN Manager Enhanced workstation when the Messenger service and the Netpopup or the Minipop service are running. See also Messenger service, Netpopup service. message buffer A buffer used to hold incoming messages. The size of this buffer determines the size of messages that the workstation can receive. See also buffer.

message forwarding To use aliases to reroute messages from one LAN Manager Enhanced workstation to another. See also alias. message line Text displayed at the bottom of the LAN Manager Screen that provides information about the current menu, command, dialog box, or task. See also LAN Manager Screen. message log A LAN Manager Enhanced file used to store a workstations messages as they are received. message logging To save a LAN Manager Enhanced workstations messages in a file. See also error log, message log. Messenger service A LAN Manager Enhanced service that enables a workstation to receive messages from other network users and from the Alerter service. This service can also store messages in a log file. See also Netpopup service. Microsoft Windows An operating system that permits you to run several programs at once, and to move easily from one program to another. modem A device that allows computer information to be transmitted and received over a telephone line. The transmitting modem translates digital computer data into analog signals that can be carried on a phone line. The receiving modem translates the analog signals back into digital form.

359

Glossary

MS-DOS Microsoft Disk Operating System. This is the operating system on which LAN Manager Basic and Enhanced run. MS-DOS prompt See prompt. named pipe A connection used to transfer data between separate processes, usually on separate computers. Named pipes are the foundation of interprocess communication (IPC). Net Logon service The service that implements logon security. This service is called Net Logon on Windows NT Advanced Servers and Netlogon on LAN Manager servers. When a server in a domain runs this service, the username and password supplied by each user who attempts to log on in the domain are checked. Netpopup service A LAN Manager Enhanced service that displays messages on your computer screen as they arrive from other local area network users or from LAN Manager. The Netpopup service requires that the Messenger service be running. Users of the Windows operating system may use Minipop instead of Netpopup. See also Messenger service. NetWare Connectivity A LAN Manager feature that lets a computer run both LAN Manager and Novell NetWare so that one computer can act as a workstation on a Windows NT or LAN Manager network and a NetWare network at the same time. network device driver Software that

coordinates communication between the network adapter and the computers hardware and other software, controlling the physical function of the network adapters. network directory See shared directory. network path The computername of a server followed by the sharename of a shared resource. A servers computername is preceded by two backslashes (\\), and a sharename is preceded by one backslash (for example, \\SALES\REPORTS). You connect your workstation to a shared resource by specifying its network path. See also computername, resource, sharename. network resource A resource that is available to local area network users. See also resource, shared resource. network security A system used to protect network resources from unauthorized access. NT See Windows NT. NT file system See NTFS. NTFS An advanced file system designed for use specifically within the Windows NT operating system. It supports file system recovery, extremely large storage media, and various features for the POSIX subsystem. It also supports object-oriented applications by treating all files as objects with userdefined and system-defined attributes.

360

Glossary

null modem Special cabling that eliminates the need for modems for asynchronous communications between two computers over short distances. option Part of a command that can modify how the command or service works but which is not required. option button A button in a LAN Manager Screen dialog box used to select one option from a group of options. other domains Domains other than the logon and workstation domains of which your LAN Manager Enhanced workstation is a member, and which you have specified as domains you want to be able to view. See also domain, logon domain, workstation domain. password A security measure used to restrict logons to user accounts and access to computer systems and resources. A password is a unique string of characters that must be provided before a logon or an access is authorized. The password, together with the username, establishes the users identity on the local area network. See also logon password. path Specifies the location of a file within the directory tree. For example, to specify the path of a file named README.WRI located in the WINDOWS directory on drive C, you would type c:\windows\readme.wri. pathname The name of one or more directories followed by a filename. For example, the pathname of the

MONTHLY.RPT file in the REPORTS\ACCT\NORTH directory is REPORTS\ACCT\NORTH\MONTHL Y.RPT. pause To suspend a LAN Manager service. See also continue. permission A setting on a shared resource that defines the type(s) of action a user can take with a shared resource. phone book A file that associates names with telephone numbers, COM ports, and baud rates. phone book entry A record in the Phone Book that associates a name with a telephone number, COM port, and baud rate. pointer A small graphic symbol that indicates a users location on the screen. The mouse pointer on the LAN Manager Screen is a small lighted rectangle. pool A group of similar devices that receives requests from the same queue. port A connection or socket used to connect a device, such as a printer, monitor, or modem, to your computer. Information is sent from your computer to the device through a cable. preset-number callback A form of security in which a Remote Access server verifies users by calling them back at numbers supplied by the network administrator at the time user permissions are granted. A preset callback number can only be changed by

361

Glossary

the network administrator. This ensures that no one can borrow a users password and connect to the server from a location other than the users normal one. primary domain controller The LAN Manager server at which the master copy of a domains user accounts database is maintained. The primary domain controller also validates logon requests. See also Net Logon service. print job A file sent to a printer queue to be printed. printer device Any device that prints information. Printer devices are identified by their devicenames. See also devicename. printer driver A program that controls how your computer and printer interact. printer queue A waiting line that manages and routes print jobs. privilege The level assigned for each user that defines the range of action a user can have on the local area network. program file A file that starts an application or program. A program file has an .EXE, .PIF, .COM, or .BAT filename extension. prompt The symbol that tells you an operating system or program is ready to receive a command. You type commands at the prompt. remote Refers to a server, workstation, or resource that is not located where you

are currently working. See also local. Remote Access server Any Windows NT computer or LAN Manager server that is configured to run the Remote Access service. Remote Access service A service allowing users to connect to Windows NT or LAN Manager networks from long or short distances, using modems and telephone lines instead of network cable connections. remote computer See remote. remote local area network The local area network to which you are connected by means of a phone line. remote name The network path used to connect a devicename to a shared resource. See also devicename and network path. remote program request A request for access to a program that is not resident on the computer where you are currently working. remote server See remote. resource Any part of a computer system or local area network, such as a disk drive, directory, printer or memory that can be allotted to a program or process while it is running. See also shared resource. root directory See directory tree. run To start a program or command.

362

Glossary

scroll To move through text or graphics (up, down, left, or right) in order to See parts of a file or dialog box that cannot fit on the screen. scroll bar A bar that appears at the right and/or bottom edge of a window or list box whose contents are not completely visible. Each scroll bar contains two scroll arrows and a scroll box, which enable you to scroll through the contents of the window or list box. scroll box The small box superimposed on the scroll bar that appears at the right of some LAN Manager Screen list boxes. The scroll box reflects the position of the information within the window in relation to the total contents of the list. See also scroll bar. serial port A port on computer equipment that enables asynchronous transmission of data characters one bit at a time. Also called a communication port. server A computer on a local area network that controls access to resources such as files and printers. A LAN Manager server can also function as a workstation. In Windows NT Advanced Server domains, a server is a computer that receives a copy of the domains security policy and domain database, and authenticates network logons. See also domain controller, primary domain controller. service A process that performs a specific system function and often provides an application programming interface (API) for other processes to

call. The main components of LAN Manager are the LAN Manager services. session A link between a workstation and a server. A session consists of one or more connections to shared resources. See also connection. set-by-caller callback A form of callback in which the user supplies the callback number at the time the call is made. It allows traveling business users, for example, to reverse long-distance telephone charges. The server prompts the user for the users telephone number and then calls the user back at that number. Setup program A program that installs LAN Manager Enhanced or Basic software on a workstation. share To make resources, such as directories and printers, available to network users. shared directory A directory that network users can connect to. shared printer See printer queue. shared printer queue See printer queue. shared resource A resource available to users of the local area network. See also resource. sharename A name that identifies a shared resource. See also computername, shared resource.

363

Glossary

sharing The process by which resources are made available to local area network users. software The programs, routines, or instructions written in a computer language that instruct the computer to perform one or more tasks. source directory The directory that contains the file or files you intend to copy or move. spooled queue A queue used with printers that are configured with a parallel interface. Spooled queues are identified with devicenames LPT1 through LPT9. See also devicename, printer queue, unspooled queue. string Any contiguous set of alphabetic and numeric characters that will be treated as a unit. subdirectory A directory within a directory. text box An area in a LAN Manager Screen dialog box where you type information. The text box may or may not contain text when it appears. text file A file containing only letters, numbers, and symbols. A text file contains no formatting information, except possibly linefeeds and carriage returns. A text file is an ASCII file. text-only An ASCII file that contains no formatting. time-out A condition where an

expected character is not received in time. When this condition occurs, the software assumes that the data has been lost and requests it to be resent. title bar The area at the top of a LAN Manager Screen dialog box where its title appears. touch-tone dialing A form of dialing using multiple-tone signaling. The user hears a series of tones (beeps) when dialing. Push-button telephones usually use touch-tone dialing. trust See trust relationship. trust relationship Links between Windows NT Advanced Server domains that enable pass-through authentication, in which a user has only one user account in one domain yet can access the entire network. User accounts and global groups defined in a trusted domain can be given rights and resource permissions in a trusting domain, even though those accounts dont exist in the trusting domains database. A trusting domain honors the logon authentications of a trusted domain. unspooled queue A queue used with printers that are configured with a serial interface. Unspooled queues are identified with devicenames COM1 through COM9. LAN Manager for UNIX Systems does not support unspooled queues. See also devicename, printer queue, spooled queue. user Someone who uses the local area network.

364

Glossary

user account The record on a Windows NT Advanced Server or LAN Manager server that contains information about an authorized user, including his or her name, password, and permissions, as determined by the administrator. username A unique name identifying a user account on the network. See also user account. wildcard A character that represents one or more characters. The question mark (?) wildcard can be used to represent any single character, and the asterisk (*) wildcard can be used to represent any character or group of characters that might match that position in other filenames. Windows See Microsoft Windows. Windows NT The portable, secure, 32bit, preemptive multitasking member of the Microsoft Windows operating system family. Windows NT Advanced Server A superset of Windows NT, Windows NT Advanced Server provides centralized management and security, advanced fault tolerance and additional connectivity. workstation A computer from which a person uses word processing, spreadsheet, database, and other types of applications to accomplish work, taking advantage of resources shared on the local area network. workstation domain The Windows NT or LAN Manager domain

into which a LAN Manager Enhanced workstation logs on unless another domain is specified. See also domain, logon domain, other domains. workstation resource A resource that is attached to or part of a users computer (for example, a local printer). See also local. Workstation service A LAN Manager service that enables a computer to use network resources and services. This service must be running for any other service to run.

365

Glossary Compatibility Issues

366

Index

A Abbreviating commands, 96 Accounts menu Change your password command, 42 overview, 30 Your account command, 41 Adding remote computers, 230 addname utility adding entries to LMHOSTS file, 107, 231 description, 106, 107, 230, 231 syntax, 106 Aliases adding, 93, 142, 143 command, 93, 94 deleting, 93, 142, 143 domain names, 87 forwarding, 154 maximum per workstation, 353 sending messages to, 87 usernames, 87 viewing, 142 B b switch, 326 Batch files, 53 Batch programs, 100, 226 Baud rate, 341 Beep from workstation, 89, 134 Binding protocols, 175, 326 Broadcasting messages, 155, 288 Buffers, 182 C c switch, 326 Callback, 332 Cancelling print jobs, 76 capture command, 291 Check box, 34 clipcach command, 109, 111, 232, 234 clispool command, 112, 114, 235, 237 Clocks, synchronizing, 164 Command button, 34 Command(s) capture, 291 clipcach, 109, 111, 232, 234 clispool, 112, 114, 235, 237 kermit, 115, 238

load, 326 map, 289 net, 119 net access, 120, 123 net config workstation, 124 net continue, 125, 242 net copy, 127, 129 net help, 130, 204, 243 net help netware, 291 net helpmsg, 132 net logoff, 135 net logon, 97, 136, 139, 223 net move, 140 net name, 93, 142, 206, 245 net password, 145 net pause, 148, 246 net print, 150, 247, 248 net send, 154 net start encrypt, 157 net start messenger, 158 net start netpopup, 160 net start workstation, 161, 249 net stop workstation, 163, 189 net time, 164 net use, 165, 169, 250, 254, 289, 291 net version, 170 net view, 171 net who, 173 netbind, 175 netrun, 67, 176, 255, 257 nwload, 286 nwunload, 286 printsta, 182, 188, 261, 267 rasdial, 329, 334 rasload, 326, 328, 329 rasphone, 328, 329 Remote Access Service, 329 uchmod, 190, 269, 271, 308 ud, 193, 272, 304, 306 udir, 195, 274, 275, 299, 301 UNIX, 229 unload, 325 uren, 199, 278, 302 working with abbreviating, 96, 222 at command line, 287 choosing in menus, 27

choosing with the mouse, 27 command summary, 101, 104, 227, 229 comparison of in other networks, 291, 294 expediting a command, 97, 223 password requirements, 98 use in batch programs, 100, 226 viewing a list of, 243, 291 with NetWare Connectivity, 291, 294 Compression, 345, 346, 351 computername assigning, 245 deleting from alias list, 94 determining what is assigned, 26 maximum length, 230 setting at startup, 249 viewing, 245 Comspec environmental option, 128 Config menu Log off from LAN command, 51 overview, 29 Workstation options command, 48 CONFIG.SYS file, 347 Configuration, 48 Connection(s) continuing, 215, 242 pausing, 215, 246 setup assigning drive letters for, 289, 290 cancelling, 163 disconnecting from network, 291 displaying, 287 loading protocols, 54 modem, 339, 343, 344 Remote Access Service, 328 shared directories, 63, 205, 207 shared printers, 217 to IBM LAN Server Resources, 62 to remote computers, 181, 260, 328 troubleshooting, 63 viewing, 64, 165, 171, 214, 250, 254 types persistent, 61, 165, 171, 334

367

Index

printer, 73, 290, 291 server, 72 Conventional memory, 326 Converting files, 304, 306 Copying files, 65, 127, 129, 294 Country codes, 281 Current focus, 36, 72 D d switch, 326 Date display, 164 Deleting aliases, 93, 142, 143 computernames from alias list, 94 print jobs, 76 remote computers, 230 Demand Protocol Architecture (DPA) defined, 355 load utility, 54, 117, 240 unload utility, 198, 277 unloading before stopping workstation service, 163 Device driver, defined, 355 Devicenames for printer queues, 72 shared through NetWare Connectivity, 290 Dialog box(es), 31, 34 Directories assigning drive letters for, 289, 290 disconnecting, 68 DOSUTIL, 296 home, 49 listing, 195, 274, 275 Directories, shared connecting to, 63, 205, 207, 289, 290 defined, 57, 363 disconnecting from, 208 DOSUTIL, 296 logging off, 135 making a onetime connection, 62 using, 165, 171, 205, 250, 254 using MS-DOS commands with, 207 viewing connections, 59, 64, 290 Disconnecting from printer queues, 78 from shared directories, 68, 208

from the network, 291, 329 from workstations, 250, 254 Remote Access Service, 329 Disks, shared, 57 Displaying date and time, 164 LAN Manager screen, 99 list of users, 173 permissions, 120, 123 Domain(s) belonging to, 161 changing password for, 145 connecting to printers in others, 72 defined, 138 logon domain, 136, 138 name, 161 primary domain controller, 362 sending messages to, 154, 155 synchronizing clocks in, 164 user accounts, 40 using name for alias, 87 viewing servers in, 59, 171 workstation, 26, 136, 138 DPA See Demand Protocol Architecture, 54 Drive letters, shared, 289 E Encrypt service, 25 End-of-job signal, 212 Error control, 345, 346 Error messages defined, 356 for Remote Access Service, 334, 338 help messages for, 132 network drive, 289 when sending messages, 155 Exiting LAN Manager Screen, 50 F File(s) CONFIG.SYS, 347 converting, 193, 272, 304, 306 copying, 65, 127, 129, 294 exchanging between workstations, 115, 311, 314 LANMAN.INI, 347, 349 listing, 195, 274, 275, 299, 301

MODEM.INF, 339, 346 moving, 66, 140, 199, 278, 302 naming, 199, 278, 298, 302 PHONE.INF, 330 piping, 306 PROTOCOL.INI, 347 using, 165, 171 filer utility, 288 Finding users on network, 173 G Gateways, 230 H Help system activating, 34, 291, 329 displaying a Help message box, 34 for error messages, 105, 132 for net commands, 104, 130 for phone book, 330 for Remote Access Service, 329 LAN Manager Basic, 204, 243 menu, 30 High-performance file system (HPFS), 357 Home directory, 49 Host computer, 309, 311 I IBM LAN Server Resource, connecting to, 62 Installing Remote Access Service, 323, 326 Interprocess communication (IPC), 360 K kermit terminal emulator, 115, 238, 309, 314 Keyboard troubleshooting, 320 L LAN Server aliases, 62 Language of messages, assigning, 281 LANMAN.INI file, 347, 349 List box, 32 load command, 326 load utility, 54, 117, 240 Loading Novell NetWare, 286

368

Index

Locking user account, 137 Log file, renaming, 91 Logging off from network, 51, 135, 291 from UNIX from workstation, 311 from workstation service, 163 Logging on equivalent network commands, 291 procedure, 24 security measures, 360 to host computer vs. servers, 309 to network, 136 to UNIX, 115, 309, 311 Logon domain, 136, 138 M Macintosh operating system, 298 Macros in MODEM.INF. file, 341, 344 map command, 289 Memory, conserving, 326 Menus Accounts, 30 choosing commands, 27 Config, 29 Help, 30 Message, 29 overview, 27, 31 View, 28 Message log defined, 89 description, 85 LANMAN.DOSLOGS directory, 91 reading, 90, 134 receiving messages for many users, 90 renaming, 91 saving messages, 133 stopping message logging, 91 Message menu Aliases command, 93, 94 Log messages to file command, 91 overview, 29 Read message log file command, 90 Send a typed message command, 87 Message(s) assigning a language for a user, 281 broadcasting, 88, 155, 288, 353 closing a message box, 89 displaying, 89, 134

error, 132 language used for, 281 log, 85 maximum length, 294 printing, 92, 133 reading, 89 reading message log, 89, 90 receipt notification, 89 receiving, 89, 90, 142, 158 sending, 85, 88, 154, 294 size limit, 154 specifying language of, 355 Messenger service defined, 25, 89, 359 print job notices, 70 receiving messages, 142 setup to receive messages, 89 starting, 158 Microsoft LAN Manager, 22 Basic version, 357 Basic version, 6 command processing with NetWare Connectivity, 291 commands listed, 291, 294 compatibility with Novell NetWare, 287 defined, 357 determining version that is running, 170 directory connections, 289, 290 Enhanced version, 23, 25, 51, 357 Enhanced version, 6 NetWare command equivalents, 291, 294 overview, 4 pausing service, 44, 47 printer connections, 290 screen, 22, 26, 358 starting, 43, 53, 286 stopping, 44 UNIX commands, 296 Microsoft LAN Manager screen controlling the display, 99 exiting, 50 starting, 119 using, 24, 288 using a left-handed mouse, 27 Microsoft Windows for Workgroups, 36 Microsoft Windows, installing Remote Access Service on, 324

Modems connecting, 343, 344 MODEM.INF file, 339, 343, 344, 346 troubleshooting response problems, 333 Mouse, left-handed, 27 Moving files, 66, 140, 278 MS-DOS operating system activating from UNIX, 311 commands, 207 converting files to UNIX, 304, 305 installing Remote Access Service on, 323 listing files, 299 naming files, 298 piping converted files, 307 typing a path at the prompt, 37 wildcard characters, 301, 302, 365 N Name(s) computername, 26 domain, 26 username, 26 Naming files, 298 net access command, 120, 123 net command, 119 net config workstation command, 124 net continue command, 125, 242 net copy command, 127, 129 net help command, 130, 204, 243 net help netware command, 291 net helpmsg command, 132 net logoff command, 135 net logon command, 97, 136, 139, 223 net move command, 140 net name command, 93, 142, 206, 245 net password command, 145 net pause command, 148, 246 net print command, 150, 247, 248 net send command, 154 net start encrypt command, 157 net start messenger command, 158 net start netpopup command, 160 net start workstation command, 161, 249 net stop workstation command, 163, 189 net time command, 164 net use command, 165, 169, 250, 254, 289, 291

369

Index

net version command, 170 net view command, 171 net who command, 173 netbind command, 175 Netpopup service and message logging, 89 closing a message box, 89 defined, 25, 360 displaying messages, 89 print job notice, 70 receiving messages, 89, 142 starting, 160 Winpopup replacement, 89 netrun command, 67, 176, 255, 257 NetWare Connectivity, 284 defined, 360 directory drive letters shared, 289 overview, 284 printer devicenames shared, 290 unloading, 259 use with Microsoft Windows program, 287 Network products, working with other, 73 Non-LAN Manager servers, connecting to, 73 Novell NetWare command processing with NetWare Connectivity, 291, 294 commands listed, 291, 294 compatibility with Microsoft LAN Manager, 287 directory connections, 289, 290 LAN Manager command equivalents, 291, 294 loading and unloading, 286 maximum message length, 294 Microsoft Windows use precautions, 286 printer connections, 290 starting and stopping, 286 nwload command, 286 nwload utility, 179, 258, 259 nwunload command, 286 nwunload utility, 180 O Option buttons, 34 OS/2 operating system, 298

P Paper jams, 76 Password(s) changing, 42, 138, 145, 294 coding before transmittal, 157 defined, 137 expiration, 138, 146 locking account after guessing, 137 logging on with, 136 maintaining confidentiality, 146 using with net commands, 98, 206 Path(s), 37 Pausing connections, 215 printer connections, 47 reactivating services after, 125, 148 workstation connections, 246 workstation service, 44, 47, 148 Permissions changing, 120, 123, 190, 269, 271 displaying, 120, 123 UNIX, 301, 308 Persistent connections, 61, 165, 166, 171, 250 Phone Book, 328, 329 Phone numbers, 330, 341 PHONE.INF file, 330 ping utility, 181, 260 Piping converted files, 306 Power for printers, 83, 84, 219 Print jobs background printing, 319 cancelling, 76 clearing print buffer, 268 completion notice, 70 defined, 70 deleting, 76 holding and releasing, 76 initiating, 74, 211, 294 message, 92, 133 not printing, 78 on shared printer, 182 restarting, 76 setup, 182, 188 status of, 211 troubleshooting, 319 Print spooling programs clipcach, 81

clispool, 81 print station, 81 Print Station utility buffers, 182 description, 81 loading, 187 using from remote computer, 187 Printer queue(s) connecting to, 165, 171, 210, 250, 254, 290 controlling queued jobs, 150 defined, 70 disconnecting from, 78, 212 displaying contents, 247 making a onetime connection, 73 printing, using the LAN Manager Screen, 74 viewing queue information, 150 servers, 151 status, 75, 211 with several printers, 70 Printer(s) connections, 290, 291 disabling, 218 pausing connections, 47 port IDs, 80 power, 83, 84, 219 Printers, shared administrator responsibilities, 217 clipcach setup command, 109 clispool setup command, 112, 114 connecting, 217 defined, 70 link maintenance, 218 managing, 80, 84, 216, 220 printing on, 232 recommendations for use, 80, 216 responsibilities for use, 81, 217, 220 spooling, 83 troubleshooting, 318 use with NetWare Connectivity, 290 user responsibilities, 218 using, 210 printsta command, 182, 188, 261, 267 Program(s) running on a server, 176

370

Index

Protocol(s) binding, 175, 326 listing, 325 loading, 175, 198 registering, 326 unloading, 325 PROTOCOL.INI file, 198, 326, 347 prtsc utility, 189, 268 Q Quitting LAN Manager, 51 R r switch, 326 rasdial command, 334 rasload command, 326, 328 rasphone command, 328 Reactivating a service, 125 Remote Access drivers, 326, 329, 333 Remote Access Service, 321, 351 Remote computers, 181, 230, 260, 321, 351 Renaming files, 278 Resource(s), 36, 38 Restarting print jobs, 76 S Saving messages, 133 Scroll bar, 33 Server(s) connecting to other than current, 72 defined, 5 defined, 4 displaying connections, 287 listing, 26, 36, 59, 294 logging onto, 309 running programs on, 67 setting current focus, 36 UNIX, 232 user listing, 38 viewing, 36, 38 viewing printer queues, 151 Services continuing, 46 pausing, 44, 47, 148 reactivating after pause, 125 starting, 43 stopping, 44, 163

Shared printers, 57 Spooling, 83 Starting NetWare Connectivity, 258 Novell NetWare, 286 restarting print jobs, 76 the workstation, 97, 223 workstation service, 25, 43, 53, 161 Stopping network requests, 27 workstation service, 44 Switches, 326, 329, 330 syscon utility, 288 T TCP/IP, 230 Temp environment variable, 55 Terminal emulators, 115, 238, 309, 314 Text box, 32 Time display, 164 Troubleshooting computer problems, 318 connections, 63 drive ID link errors, 320 isolating problems, 317 keyboard not working, 320 message transfer, 155 modem response problems, 333 printing difficulties, 78, 319 Remote Access Service problems, 332, 338 shared printers, 318 U u switch, 326, 329 uchmod command, 190, 269, 271, 308 ud command, 193, 272, 304, 306 udir command, 195, 274, 275, 299, 301 UMB, 161 UNIX activating from MS-DOS, 311 changing permissions, 190, 269, 271 commands, 229 commands on LAN Manager, 296 converting files to MS-DOS, 193, 272, 304, 305 listing files, 274, 275, 299, 301 logging off from host computer, 311

logging on to host computer, 115, 309, 311 moving files, 199, 302 naming files, 199, 298, 302 permissions, 301, 308 running programs on, 255 servers, 232 transferring files from, 311, 314 unload command, 325 unload utility, 54, 198, 277 Unloading Novell NetWare, 286 Upper Memory, 161, 326 uren command, 199, 278, 302 User accounts country codes for messages, 281 master copy location, 362 overview, 40 passwords for, 137, 145 Username, 26 Users, viewing, 38, 173 Utilities addname, 230, 231 filer, 288 load, 54, 117, 240 nwload, 179, 258, 259 nwunload, 180 ping, 181, 260 Print Station, 219, 266 prtsc, 189, 268 syscon, 288 unload, 54, 198, 277 V View menu Available resources command viewing resources, 37 overview, 28 Print queues command, 76 reviewing network resources, 36 Used resources command connecting to a printer queue, 73 disconnecting from a printer queue, 78 disconnecting from a shared directory, 68 viewing printer queue connections, 75

371

Index

viewing resource connections, 64 Users on a server command, 38, 39 Viewing aliases, 142 commands, list of, 243, 291 computername, 245 connections, 64, 165, 171, 214, 250, 254 directory connections, 59, 64, 290 domains, servers in, 59, 171 net view command, 171 printer queue information, 150 servers, 151 status, 75, 211 resources, shared, 36, 38 servers, 36, 38 user accounts, 137 users, 173 workstation setup, 48, 124, 167, 214, 252 W Wildcard characters, 301, 302 Winpopup utility, 89 Workstation service adjusting performance, 124 adjusting the display, 24 defined, 365 Encrypt service, 25 Messenger service, 25 Netpopup service, 25 pausing, 44, 47 placing on hold, 44, 47 resuming after pause, 46 starting, 25, 43, 53, 161 stopping, 44, 163, 326, 329 viewing configuration, 124 Workstation(s) aliases, 93, 94 connecting remote to network, 325 defined, 4 disconnecting, 250, 254 domain, 136, 138, 161 exchanging files between, 115 maximum number of aliases, 353 setting time on, 294 starting, 249

transferring files from UNIX to, 311, 314 viewing connections, 214 viewing setup, 48, 167, 252 Y y switch, 329

372